JP2018068891A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To appropriately totalize a value to be assigned to a player in the game machine including a normal variable device.SOLUTION: When a special symbol variable display is terminated in (1), special symbol combination winning symbols of probability variation B are stationarily displayed, and when a special symbol winning game state of probability variation B is started in (2), a special symbol winning signal is turned on, a special signal is turned on, and an advantageous state signal is turned on. When the special symbol winning game state of probability variation B is terminated in (3), the special symbol winning signal is turned off, and the game state is shifted to a fifth game state. A special symbol variable display is started in (4), the special symbol variable display is terminated in (5), special symbol combination winning symbols of probability variation E are stationarily displayed, and the special signal is turned off.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 67

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine that performs variable display, normal symbol variable display is executed, and the normal symbol display result becomes the display result per ordinary diagram, and the ordinary electric accessory (so-called electric chew) is released, and the prize ball (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-171759 A

  However, with regard to a gaming machine such as Patent Document 1, it is difficult to properly tabulate the value given to the player when the ordinary variable device (ordinary electric accessory) enters the state where the game medium can enter. There was a problem that there was.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and it is possible to appropriately total the value given to a player in a gaming machine equipped with a normally variable device.

  The present invention employs the following means in order to solve the above problems. In addition, although the code | symbol used in description of the form for implementing invention mentioned later and drawing is added for reference, the component of this invention is not limited to what attached | subjected this code | symbol.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
Special variable display means (first special symbol display 4A, second special symbol) capable of variably displaying special identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol) and deriving and displaying a specific display result (design per symbol) Design indicator 4B),
First control execution means for executing a first control for changing the special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7 (special electricity)) to a state in which a game medium can enter in response to the specific display result being derived and displayed. A game control microcomputer 100) for executing the processes of S46 to S48;
Ordinary variable display means (ordinary symbol display device 20) capable of variably displaying normal identification information (ordinary symbol) and deriving and displaying a predetermined display result (ordinary symbol per symbol);
Second control execution means for executing second control for changing the ordinary variable device (ordinary variable winning ball device 27 (general power)) to a state in which a game medium can be entered in response to the predetermined display result being derived and displayed. (Game control microcomputer 100 for executing the process of S104),
Grant signal output means (information output circuit 64) capable of outputting a grant signal (for example, an overall safe signal, a right area safe signal) for specifying a given value (for example, a safe number) given to the player;
Advantageous states that are advantageous to the player (for example, from the start of a gaming state per special figure that changes from a low base state to a high base state to a special type per special figure that changes from a high base state to a low base state Advantageous state signal output means capable of outputting an advantageous state signal corresponding to the end of the gaming state per figure, or the state until the end of the variable display of a fixed number of times (one time, 100 times) resulting in a display error. Output circuit 64);
A special signal that can output a special signal for specifying a special period including a period during which the second control is executed (for example, a normal power release period) regardless of whether or not a game medium enters the normal variable device. Signal output means (information output circuit 64);
Is further provided.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately total the values given to the player as the second control is executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine of means 1,
The advantageous state includes a specific state with the first control (for example, a gaming state per special figure) and a special state in which the execution rate of the second control is higher than a non-special state (for example, a high base state). ,
The advantageous state signal output means can output the advantageous state signal continuously between the specific state and the special state (for example, a special type per special figure changing from a low base state to a high base state). From the start of the gaming state per figure to the end of the gaming state per special figure for each special figure that changes from the high base state to the low base state, or a fixed number of times (1 time, 100 times) that results in an outlier display result Outputs an advantageous state signal that is continuously output over the period until the end of display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately total the values given to the player in the specific state and the special state.

The gaming machine of means 3 is
A gaming machine of means 1 or means 2,
The special signal output means is capable of outputting the special signal when the first control is executed in the high probability state and the special state (for example, high-accuracy base state) (for example, the fifth gaming state) In (rush), the period controlled in the gaming state per special figure and the opening period of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 correspond to each other, so that the output state is set in the period controlled in the gaming state per special figure. Based on the special signal, TY and T1Y can be appropriately tabulated from the safe number and out number in the gaming state per special figure)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately add up the values given when the first control is executed in the high probability state and the special state.

The gaming machine of means 4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 1 to the means 3,
The special signal output means is shifted to a low probability state and the non-special state (e.g., low probability low base state) in the low probability state and the special state (e.g., low probability base state), or The special signal can be output corresponding to the period until the high probability state and the special state (for example, the high-accuracy and high-base state) are shifted (for example, in the third gaming state (chance zone), the out-of-band design) The special signal continues to be output until the symbol is stopped or the symbol for the special symbol of probability variation C is stopped. In the fourth gaming state (invincible zone), the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed for 100 consecutive times. Or the special signal continues to be output until the symbol per stoppage is displayed.
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately add up values given during a period until a transition is made to a different gaming state in a low probability state and a special state.

The gaming machine of means 5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means 1 to means 4,
The special variable display means displays special identification information (second special symbol) in response to the special start condition being established based on the passage of the game medium in the special area (second start winning port of the second normal winning ball device 6B). ) Variable display,
The normal variable display means performs variable display of the normal identification information (normal symbol) in response to the normal start condition being established based on the passage of the game medium in the specific area (passage gate 41),
The special area and the specific area are arranged so that one game medium can pass through the special area and the specific area within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds) (for example, The second start winning opening is disposed immediately below the passing gate 41, and the separation distance between the passing gate 41 and the second starting winning opening is about two game balls)),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to start the variable display of the special identification information and the variable display of the normal identification information within a predetermined period by one game medium, whereby the first control is executed. It is also possible to make the period correspond to the period in which the second control is executed, and it is possible to appropriately add up the values given in the period in which both the first control and the second control are executed.

  Also, conventionally, a game that executes a symbol change according to a special figure according to the start winning prize, generates a big hit when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed, and opens the big prize opening by the number of times corresponding to the corresponding round number As a game information management device that manages game information of a machine, there is a game information management device that counts out the hits and the like during a big hit (see, for example, JP-A-2014-97161 (paragraphs 0017, 0050)). A conventional management device such as Patent Document 1 manages gaming information of a gaming machine that increases the number of balls by allowing a gaming medium to enter a winning prize opening. Therefore, it is difficult to properly tabulate gaming machines that increase the value given to players by other methods. The invention according to the following means 6 to 9 is made by paying attention to such problems, and is to appropriately total the value given to the player.

The management device of means 6 is:
Special variable display means (first special symbol display 4A, second special symbol display) for variably displaying special identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol) and deriving and displaying a specific display result (symbol per special symbol) 4B) and the special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7 (special electricity)) is controlled to change to a specific state (game state per special figure) in response to the specific display result being derived and displayed. Specific state control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of S46 to S48) and an advantageous state that is different from the specific state and is advantageous to the player (for example, from a low base state to a high base state) From the start of the game state per special figure for the type of special figure that changes to the end of the game state per special figure for the type of special figure that changes from the high base state to the low base state, or a fixed number of times that results in an outlier display result Advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of S297a to S299, S306, etc.) that can be controlled to the state until the end of the variable display (once, 100 times), and the specific state And can be controlled to a special state for giving value to the player during the advantageous state (for example, the display result of the normal symbol variation display in the high base state is When it becomes, a gaming machine (pachinko machine) provided with special state control means (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of S104) capable of executing the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long opening pattern. A management device (1000) for managing information on gaming machines 1),
A grant signal input means (communication unit 1009) to which a grant signal (for example, an overall safe signal) for specifying a given grant value (safe number) is input;
Special signal input means (communication unit 1009) for inputting a special signal corresponding to at least the period controlled in the special state;
Advantageous state signal input means (communication unit 1009) for inputting an advantageous state signal corresponding to at least the period controlled by the advantageous state;
Based on a grant signal input when the gaming machine is controlled to the special state during the advantageous state, a given value (for example, total unit difference ball number (TY) associated with the special state is given. ), T1Y, etc.) that can be aggregated (CPU 1002 that aggregates various game data),
It is characterized by providing.
According to such a structure, the value provided in relation to the special state different from the specific state and the advantageous state can be appropriately tabulated.

The management device of means 7 is:
A management device of means 6,
An advantageous state period specifying means (for example, a CPU 1002 for specifying a period during which the advantageous state signal is in the output state (ON), etc.) capable of specifying a period controlled to the advantageous state based on the advantageous state signal;
The tabulation means can tabulate the value given during the advantageous state (for example, the safe number during the advantageous state), which is the value given in the advantageous state,
The timing at which the advantageous state shifts to the non-advantageous state (for example, the timing at which the advantageous state signal changes from the output state (ON) to the non-output state (OFF)) and the application signal (for example, the overall safe signal) in the non-advantageous state The right region safe signal) is input within a predetermined period (for example, within 10 seconds), the value added during the advantageous state is updated based on the input of the signal.
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the values given during the advantageous state can be accurately totaled.

The management device of means 8 is:
A management device of means 6 or means 7,
An advantageous state period specifying means (for example, a CPU 1002 for specifying a period during which the advantageous state signal is in the output state (ON), etc.) capable of specifying a period controlled to the advantageous state based on the advantageous state signal;
The totaling means is obtained by the player and a used gaming value (for example, the number of outs in the high base) that is a gaming value used by the player in the period of the advantageous state and the non-specific state (for example, the high base state). A relative value with an acquired game value (for example, a high base medium safe number) that is a game value is calculated as a relative value during an advantageous state (for example, a high base payout rate BA (%)), and the relative value during the advantageous state is calculated in advance. Predetermined processing can be executed based on the relationship with the registered reference relative value (reference BA (%)) (for example, aggregated high base payout rate BA (%)> reference BA (%). A warning message or the like is displayed on the display device 1007).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the relationship between the relative value in the advantageous state and the reference relative value can be grasped by a predetermined process.

The management device of means 9 is:
Any one of the management devices selected from the means 6 to the means 8,
The gaming machine has a first path (left game area) of game media and a second path (right game area) that is different from the first path and is provided with a variable device.
The gaming machine has specific areas (for example, the second start winning port of the second normal winning ball device 6B, the normal winning port of the normal variable winning ball device 27, and the second general winning game) through which the game medium passing through the second route can enter. It is possible to output at least a specific grant signal (for example, a right region safe signal) corresponding to the grant of game value by entering the second general winning award of the ball device 29 and different from the grant signal,
The counting means performs a predetermined calculation (for example, counting the right area safe number) based on the specific assignment signal input to the input means.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately add up the game value given when the game medium enters the specific area.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-120019 (paragraph 0265)) for notifying a winning in a normal variable winning ball device by lighting a gaming effect lamp, A gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-188261 (paragraphs 0109 to 0112)) in which the progress of the fluctuating effect is stopped in accordance with the winning at the second starting port is disclosed. However, there is a problem that the effect of directing the prize is insufficient. The inventions according to the following means 10 to 15 are made by paying attention to such problems, and an object thereof is to enhance the effect of staging corresponding to winning.

The gaming machine of means 10 is
Satisfaction of start condition (for example, establishment of normal start condition of normal symbol by passing game ball through passage gate 41, special symbol by game ball passing through second start winning port of second normal winning ball device 6B) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display (for example, fluctuation display of a normal symbol, fluctuation display of a second special symbol) based on the establishment of the special start condition of
A light emitting means (for example, an LED 38 for passing effect);
The light emission mode of the light emitting means (for example, the LED for a passing effect 38a, 38b) includes a first mode (for example, a light emission mode) and a second mode (for example, a light-off mode) having lower visibility than the first mode. And a light emission control means (for example, LED control board 14) that can be controlled,
The light emission control means passes through the specific control (for example, T5 in FIG. 52, FIG. 56 (5), etc.) for changing the light emission means from the first mode to the second mode when the start condition is satisfied. The control of changing the lighting LEDs 38a and 38b from the lighting mode to the lighting mode), respectively.
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect when the start condition is satisfied by executing the specific control.

The gaming machine of means 11 is
A gaming machine of means 10,
Specific state control means that can be controlled to a specific state advantageous to the player (for example, a high base state) (for example, when the CPU 103 has a non-predictable B or a probable B per type in S318 in the special symbol end process) To set the high base flag to execute the high base control),
The light emission control means can execute the specific control when the start condition is satisfied in the specific state (for example, the specific control is performed when the normal start condition or the special start condition is satisfied in the low base state. 52, the specific control is executed when the normal start condition or the special start condition is satisfied in the high base state at T5 in FIG. 52, FIG. 56 (5), etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect when the start condition is satisfied in the specific state.

The gaming machine of means 12 is
A gaming machine of means 10 or means 11,
The light emission control means changes the light emission means from the second mode to the first mode when a predetermined period (for example, 400 ms) has elapsed since the execution of the specific control (for example, FIG. T6), FIG. 56 (6), and the like can be executed to control the passage-time effect LEDs 38a and 38b from the extinguished state to the light emitting mode.
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the light-emitting means that has once become the second mode can be changed to the first mode again, thereby improving the effect.

The gaming machine of means 13 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from means 10 to means 12,
There are a plurality of light emitting means (for example, there are three LEDs 38a, 38b, 38c for effect when passing)
The light emission control means changes the specific light emission means (for example, the passing effect LEDs 38a and 38b) among the plurality of light emission means from the first aspect to the second aspect as the specific control, and The light emission mode of the light emission unit (for example, the LED 38c for passing effect) different from the specific light emission unit is different from the first mode and the second mode in a special mode (for example, FIG. 52 (T5) and FIG. 56 (5). ) And so on.
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the presentation effect can be improved due to the presence of the light emitting means that is a special mode.

The gaming machine of means 14 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 10 to the means 13,
Information display means (for example, a ball) that can display predetermined information (for example, an advantageous section prize ball number that is the total value of the number of prize balls given in the advantageous section controlled in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state). A number notification LED 39),
The information display means can display the predetermined information regardless of whether the specific control is executed by the light emission control means (for example, as shown in T12 of FIG. 53, FIG. 58 (12), etc.). In this way, even when the passing effect LEDs 38a and 38b are in the off state, the number of advantageous section prize balls can be continuously displayed).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the fact that the predetermined information is not displayed with the execution of the specific control.

The gaming machine of means 15 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 10 to the means 14,
Variable winning means (for example, a normal variable winning ball apparatus 27) that can be controlled between a first state (for example, a closed state) and a second state (for example, an open state) through which game media can pass more easily than the first state. In addition,
The variable winning means has a special light emitting means (for example, an open notification LED 36) different from the light emitting means,
The light emission control means includes
When the variable winning means is in the second state, the light emission mode of the special light emission unit is the first special mode (for example, blue lighting),
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in T10 of FIG. 53, as shown in FIG. 58 (10), the game ball has entered the second start winning opening during a period in which the normal winning opening is long open), The light emission mode of the special light emitting means is a second special mode (for example, red lighting) different from the first special mode,
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize that the variable winning means has entered the second state by the light emission mode of the special light emitting means, and also to the player that the predetermined condition is satisfied. It can be recognized.

  In addition, conventionally, after the big hit, the player starts counting the number of acquired balls acquired during the big hit, subject to the occurrence of a special big hit that triggers the occurrence of a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A game machine is disclosed in which, when a big hit is drawn in the gaming state, the number of acquired balls counted during the big hit is added to the number of acquired balls immediately before the occurrence of the big hit, and the result is the current number of acquired balls. (For example, refer to JP2012-152595A (FIG. 20)). However, in such a conventional technique, there is a problem in that it is not taken into account that the game value is properly counted with respect to a gaming machine that prompts the player to launch a game medium in a predetermined area within the game area. The inventions relating to the following means 16 to means 21 have been made paying attention to such problems, and an object thereof is to appropriately aggregate game values.

The gaming machine of means 16 is
A gaming machine that launches gaming media into the gaming area (2) and plays a game,
Notification means (for example, a right-handed notification LED 37) capable of executing a firing promotion notification (for example, a right-handed promotion notification) that prompts the player to launch a game medium in a predetermined region (for example, a right game region) in the game area;
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a specific area provided in the predetermined area (for example, the normal winning opening changed to the open state by the normal winning opening door of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27) (for example, once) Granting means (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100) for granting 10 award balls)
Game value given in a specific period corresponding to the execution period of the launch promotion notification (for example, as shown in T17 of FIG. 54, FIG. 60 (17), the game value is controlled to the fourth game state or the fifth game state). A totaling means (for example, the production control CPU 120) capable of counting the number of advantageous section award balls given to the advantageous section).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, the gaming value can be appropriately tabulated with respect to the gaming machine capable of executing the firing promotion notification.

The gaming machine of means 17 is
A gaming machine of means 16,
Game control means for controlling the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) and effects (for example, the frame LED 9, the opening notification LED 36, the right) based on the command (for example, the effect control command) received from the game control means The effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 and the effect control means) that controls the hitting notification LED 37, the passing effect LED 38, and the ball number notification LED each emit light in a predetermined manner according to a predetermined condition. Each production device connected to the production control board 12),
The effect control means includes the notification means (for example, right-handed notification LED 37) and the counting means (for example, effect control CPU 120), and a command for controlling the firing promotion notification from the game control means. The specific period is determined based on (for example, a right-handed lighting start designation command and a right-handed lighting end designation command shown in T3 of FIG. 52 and T17 of FIG. 54).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately aggregate the game value based on the command for controlling the launch promotion notification.

The gaming machine of means 18 is
A gaming machine of means 17,
The effect control means receives a start command for starting the firing promotion notification (for example, a right-handed lighting start designation command at T3 in FIG. 52), and then ends a firing command (for example, , A period until the right-handed lighting end designation command is received at T17 in FIG. 54 is determined as the specific period.
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily determine the specific period, and it is possible to appropriately aggregate the game value.

The gaming machine of means 19 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 16 to the means 18,
Variable display means (normal symbol display 20, second special symbol display 4B) for executing variable display (for example, normal symbol variation display, second special symbol variation display);
An effect information display means (for example, an effect display device 5) configured by an apparatus (for example, a liquid crystal display device) different from the notification means and capable of displaying the effect information (effect effect symbol) corresponding to the variable display, Prepared,
The effect information display means can execute the firing promotion notification based on conditions different from the notification means (for example, as shown in T4 of FIG. 52 and FIG. 56 (4), start designation per special figure). The right-handed promotion image is displayed at the timing when the transition to the high base state is made at the end of execution of the end effect per special figure, not the timing at which the command is received (timing to display the fanfare effect image per special figure),
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to urge the game medium to be launched to a predetermined area at an appropriate timing without being limited to the firing promotion notification by the notification unit.

The gaming machine of means 20 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 16 to the means 19,
Aggregated value storage means that can store the aggregated value (for example, the number of advantageous section prize balls) that has been aggregated by the aggregation means even after the specified period has elapsed (for example, the advantageous period has ended and the first gaming state (low probability) Further including a RAM 122) of the effect control board 12 for continuously storing the number of advantageous section prize balls after the transition to the low base state),
Even when the game value is given by the grant means after the specific period has elapsed, the total value stored in the total value storage means is not updated (for example, the first gaming state after T17 in FIG. 54) (Even if a prize ball is awarded according to the winning in the low probability low base state, the memorized number of advantageous zone prize balls is not increased),
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, even after the specific period has elapsed, it is possible to retain the aggregate value that is aggregated during the specific period.

The gaming machine of means 21 is
A gaming machine of means 20,
The counting means is controlled again in the specific period within the predetermined period after the specific period has elapsed (for example, as shown in T21 of FIG. 54 and FIG. 61 (21), When a special figure of probability variation B that shifts to an advantageous section occurs within a period controlled to one game state (low probability low base state), the aggregate value stored in the aggregate value storage means Can be resumed based on (restarts counting from the memorable advantageous section winning ball number),
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to such a configuration, since the aggregation can be resumed based on the aggregate value accumulated in the specific period even after the specific period has elapsed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest after the specific period has elapsed. Can do.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine that performs variable display, a variable display pattern with a long variable display time is selected in a high base state, and a variable display of a normal symbol is performed during variable display of the special symbol with a long variable display time. Correspondingly, there is a display in which the effect symbols are changed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes the display result per normal symbol, and the normal electric accessory (so-called electric chew) is released, and a prize ball is given ( For example, refer to JP 2014-171759 A). However, in a conventional gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171759, if the effect symbol is controlled only by the variable symbol display state, the ordinary electric accessory becomes difficult to win. Even in the win display result, a specific combination of effect symbols may be derived and displayed, and thus the variable effect symbols can be changed so that the variable display result of the effect symbols does not become inappropriate. There was a problem that it was necessary to control the display appropriately. The invention according to the following means 22 to 29 is made by paying attention to such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately controlling the change display of the effect symbols.

The gaming machine of means 22 is
Special variable display means for variably displaying special identification information (for example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) on the basis of establishment of a special start condition (for example, a special start condition for executing variable symbol variable display) (For example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process in S27 of the timer interrupt process for game control)
Normal variable display means (for example, the CPU 103 controls the game) that performs variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) based on the establishment of normal start conditions (for example, normal start conditions for executing variable symbol display). For executing the normal symbol process in S28 of the timer interrupt process)
A special state involving the operation of a special variable device (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) based on the fact that the specific display result (for example, the display result per special figure) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the special identification information. (E.g., a gaming state per special figure), and after completion of the special state, the state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 can control the special state different from the special state (e.g., high base state)). Based on the fact that the symbols are stopped and displayed, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 controls the gaming state per special figure to execute a predetermined number of rounds to operate the door for the big winning opening and open the big winning opening, A portion that sets the high base flag and executes the high base control when the type per special figure is non-probability B or probability B in S318 in the special figure end processing), and
Based on the fact that the predetermined display result (for example, the display result per universal figure) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the normal identification information, the normal variable device (for example, the normal variable winning ball device 27) is used as a game medium (for example, (Game ball) is changed to an enterable state (for example, a first normal state (a normal winning opening is opened)), and the state when the predetermined display result is derived and displayed is the specific state and the non-specific state The normal variable device control means for changing the normal variable device to the state in which the game medium can be entered in a different period depending on which state is (for example, when the CPU 103 stops and displays the stop symbol per normal figure) When the state is a low base state, the opening control of the normally variable winning ball device 27 is executed based on the short opening pattern, and the state when the stop symbol per universal symbol is stopped and displayed is high. In the normal state, the part that executes the release control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long release pattern (S156a is executed when S155 in the normal symbol stop process is No, and S156b is executed when Yes) Part)) and
The variable display period determining means (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the variable display period of the special identification information can be determined as any one of a plurality of periods is based on the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the gaming state. A part for determining any one of a plurality of different special symbol variation patterns (a portion for executing S271 to S276 and S281 to S283 in the special symbol variation pattern setting process);
Effect symbol variation display means capable of effect symbol variation display (for example, the portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the first effect symbol effect control process of S706 and the second effect symbol effect control process of S707),
With
The effect symbol variation display means can derive and display a mode based on the variable display state of the normal identification information and the variable display state of the special identification information as the variation display result of the effect symbol (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control includes: In the 5th game state (high base state), if the variation pattern of the special symbol is a variation pattern for the open-circuit short circuit, the second effect symbol is stopped and displayed as an irregular (out of) symbol, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is In the case of the fluctuation pattern for the public electric long opening, the portion where the second effect symbols are aligned (stopped) and stopped and displayed with the symbol (the portion where S823 to S826 in the second effect symbol change start process are executed) is shown in FIG. And FIG. 50 (C), FIG. 31 (B), and FIG. 50 (I)).
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately control the variation display of the effect symbol.

The gaming machine of means 23 is a gaming machine of means 22,
The effect symbol variation display means starts the variation display of the effect symbol in response to the start of variable display of the special identification information, and before the variable identification result of the special identification information is derived and displayed, the variable display result of the normal identification information When the predetermined display result is derived and displayed, the special display result is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the effect symbol (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the special symbol in the fifth game state (high base state)). When the stop symbol per universal symbol is stopped before the variable display stops, the second effect symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed with the (success) symbol. (See FIGS. 31 (B) and 50 (I))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the variation display result of the production symbol a display result corresponding to the display result of the normal identification information while making the start of the variable display of the production symbol correspond to the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means 24 is a gaming machine of means 22 or 23,
The effect symbol variation display means starts the variation display of the effect symbol in response to the start of variable display of the special identification information, and after the variable display result of the special identification information is derived and displayed, as the variable display result of the normal identification information When the predetermined display result is derived and displayed, the non-special display result different from the special display result is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the effect symbol (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the fifth game state (high base state In FIG. 31A, FIG. 50 (A), FIG. 50 (A), and FIG. (See C)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variation display result of the effect symbol can be a display result corresponding to the display result of the normal identification information.

The gaming machine of means 25 is any gaming machine selected from means 22 to means 24, and
The variable display period determining means can determine the variable display time by selecting one variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns having different lengths of the variable display time (for example, the CPU 103 can select the variable display time according to the game state). A portion that determines one of a plurality of special symbol variation patterns with different variation display times based on the variation pattern determination table),
The state control means controls from the specific state to the non-specific state when the variable display result of the special identification information in the specific state becomes the specific display result and is controlled to the special state. Depending on the type, the state after the special state can be controlled to the non-specific state (for example, when the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol per flag is set in S295 in the special symbol stop process, S296 The high base flag is cleared if the high base flag is set).
When the display result of the variable display of the normal identification information is the predetermined display result in the non-specific state, the normal variable device control means has a disadvantageous mode in which the normal variable device can enter the game medium. (For example, when the state when the stop symbol per ordinary figure is stopped and displayed is the gaming state per special figure (low base state), the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the short opening pattern is controlled. The part which performs the release control of (the part which executes S156a when S155 in the normal symbol stop process is No))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the advantage of the accessible state in the normal variable device when the predetermined display result is derived and displayed can be changed by the variable display pattern of the special identification information selected.

The gaming machine of means 26 is any gaming machine selected from means 22 to means 25, and
In the special state, an end period determining means (for example, the CPU 103) determines an end period from the end of the state in which the special variable device can enter the game medium to the end of the special state from among a plurality of different end periods. However, in S312 in the special figure end process, the display time corresponding to the pre-special fluctuation pattern and the special figure type is specified in S312 and the value corresponding to the display time is set in the special figure end display timer. A part for executing a process for ending the end process.)
The state control means controls from the specific state to the non-specific state when the variable display result of the special identification information in the specific state becomes the specific display result and is controlled to the special state. Depending on the type, the state after the special state can be controlled to the non-specific state (for example, when the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol per flag is set in S295 in the special symbol stop process, S296 The high base flag is cleared if the high base flag is set).
When the display result of the variable display of the normal identification information is the predetermined display result in the non-specific state, the normal variable device control means has a disadvantageous mode in which the normal variable device can enter the game medium. (For example, when the state when the stop symbol per ordinary figure is stopped and displayed is the gaming state per special figure (low base state), the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the short opening pattern is controlled. The part which performs the release control of (the part which executes S156a when S155 in the normal symbol stop process is No))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the advantage of the accessible state in the ordinary variable device when the predetermined display result is derived and displayed can be changed according to the determined end period.

The gaming machine of the means 27 is any gaming machine selected from the means 22 to the means 26,
A game medium path that allows the special start condition and the normal start condition to be satisfied by passage of one game medium (for example, a game that has passed through the pass gate 41 on the right side of the effect display device 5 in the game area); A game ball path is provided through which a ball can enter the second start winning port of the second normal winning ball device 6B arranged immediately below the passing gate 41 (see FIG. 1).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to correspond the start timing of the variable display of the special identification information and the variable display of the normal identification information.

The gaming machine of means 28 is any gaming machine selected from means 22 to means 27, and
The state control means controls from the specific state to the non-specific state when the variable display result of the special identification information in the specific state becomes the specific display result and is controlled to the special state. Depending on the type, the state after the special state can be controlled to the non-specific state (for example, when the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol per flag is set in S295 in the special symbol stop process, S296 The high base flag is cleared if the high base flag is set).
Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect when the variable display result of the special identification information in the specific state is a non-specific display result different from the specific display result (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control is the fourth game state In FIG. 48, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is a non-reach variation pattern (TPA4-1 to 2), it is characterized in that the portion shown in FIG.
According to this feature, since the special effect is executed when the specific state continues due to the variable display result of the special identification information being the non-specific display result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of means 29 is any gaming machine selected from means 22 to means 28, and
The first special start condition can be satisfied based on the fact that a game medium (for example, a game ball) has entered the first special start area (for example, the first start winning port of the first normal winning ball device 6A), and Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the second special starting area (for example, the second starting winning port of the second normal winning ball device 6B), the second special starting condition can be established,
In the second special start area, the game medium is easier to enter than in the first special start area (for example, the second start winning opening of the second normal winning ball apparatus 6B is the first special winning ball apparatus 6A). Numerous obstacle nails are arranged so that game balls can enter more easily than the starting winning opening).
When the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special identification information in the non-specific state and the state control means is controlled to the special state, the state control means is the first special identification information in the non-specific state In the variable display, the state after the special state is controlled to the non-specific state at a higher rate than when the specific display result is derived and displayed and controlled to the special state (for example, the CPU 103 controls the first gaming state When a special figure hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol in the game, the game is controlled to the second game state (low base state) after the game per special figure at a rate of about 98%. When a special symbol hit occurs in a special symbol game with two special symbols, the game state is controlled to the second game state (low base state) at the rate of about 98% after the game per special symbol ends. 9 (A), FIG. 9 (B) refer)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to eliminate a capture element aiming at the second special start area where the game medium is easy to enter, and it is possible to eliminate unfairness among players.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view which shows a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. (A) (B) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which shows the classification per special figure. (A) is a special symbol display result determination table for low accuracy, and (B) is a diagram showing a special symbol display result determination table for high accuracy. (A) is a low base time normal symbol display result determination table, and (B) is a high base time normal symbol display result determination table. (A) is a type determination table A per special figure used in the first gaming state, (B) is a type determination table B per special figure used in the second gaming state, and (C) is the third gaming state. Special figure type determination table C, (D) used in the case of the fourth game state, and special figure type determination table D used in the fourth game state, (E) is the special figure used in the fifth game state. It is a figure which shows the classification determination table E. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition condition of a game state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern of a special symbol. It is a figure which shows a special electric accessory release pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the short open | release pattern in a normal electric combination, (B) is a figure which shows the long open pattern in a normal electric combination. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during normal electric utility object opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process. (A)-(D) is a figure which shows the variation pattern judgment table for detachment used in the 1st game state and the 2nd game state, (E) and (F) are in the 1st game state and the 2nd game state. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for special drawings used. (A) is a figure which shows the variation pattern judgment table for losing used in the 3rd gaming state, (B) is a figure which shows the variation pattern judgment table for special figures used in the 3rd gaming state, (C) is the 4th The figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation used in the 1st fluctuation of a gaming state, (D) is the figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation used in the 2nd fluctuation of the 4th gaming state, (E) is the 4th The figure which shows the fluctuation pattern judgment table for special figures used in the 1st fluctuation | variation of a gaming state, (F) is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern judgment table for special figures used in the 2nd fluctuation | variation of a 4th gaming state. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table for special figures used in a 5th game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the end process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error determination process. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement aspect of a special symbol, a normal symbol, a 2nd production symbol, a special variable winning ball apparatus, and a normal variable winning ball apparatus, (A) is a case where a 2nd special symbol is a short variation pattern, (B) is It is a figure which shows the case where a 2nd special symbol is a long fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st effect design effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation | designated command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st effect symbol variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during the 1st production design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st production symbol change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the end effect process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd effect design effect control process process. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of an open notification effect control process, (B) is a timing chart which shows an example of the LED lighting aspect for open notification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation | designated command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd production symbol change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd effect design change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd production symbol change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting process. It is a figure which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting aspect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display in a 3rd game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display in a 4th game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect display in a 5th game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation display mode of the 2nd production symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern as a modification of this invention, (B) is a figure which shows an example of the high-speed digestion of a 1st special symbol. It is a time chart which shows an example of the relationship between a game state and the control state of each production | presentation apparatus. It is a time chart which shows an example of the relationship between a game state and the control state of each production | presentation apparatus. It is a time chart which shows an example of the relationship between a game state and the control state of each production | presentation apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect aspect in an effect display apparatus and each LED device. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect aspect in an effect display apparatus and each LED device. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect aspect in an effect display apparatus and each LED device. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect aspect in an effect display apparatus and each LED device. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect aspect in an effect display apparatus and each LED device. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect aspect in an effect display apparatus and each LED device. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect aspect in an effect display apparatus and each LED device. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the system for games containing a management apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a management apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a whole safe signal and a right area safe signal. It is a figure which shows an example of the output period of a special signal and an advantageous state signal. It is a figure which shows an example of the game data which a management apparatus memorize | stores. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state and the output condition of each signal. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state and the output condition of each signal. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state and the output condition of each signal. It is a figure which shows the modification of a base collection object period. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a data display apparatus.

  A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is composed of, for example, a segment or a dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) or the like, and a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each of them. A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B includes a plurality of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, an alphabet indicating “F”, a symbol indicating “−”, and the like. A special symbol of a kind is displayed variably. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are formed in a square shape, for example. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, both a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”). May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. .

  An effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, the first special symbol display by the first special symbol display 4 </ b> A, the second special symbol display by the second special symbol display 4 </ b> B, the normal display by the normal symbol display 20 to be described later. A design symbol (decoration) that is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified in a design symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, for example, corresponding to each of the variable display of symbols. Is also displayed in a variable manner.

  As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, any one of the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B, and the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is started. In response to this, the variation of the effect symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Thereafter, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special game or the normal game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5C in the effect display device 5 are displayed. , 5R, the finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result of the effect symbol variation is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 5, the variable display using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A, the variable display using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B, and the normal display In synchronism with the variable display using the general symbol on the symbol display 20, a variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols each identifiable is performed, and a definite effect symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply “derived”). (Also called). In addition, for example, various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols are derived and displayed by stopping display of identification information such as effect symbols (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and ending the variable display. . On the other hand, during the variation display from the start of the variation display of the production symbol to the display of the definite production symbol that is the variation display result, the variation rate of the production symbol becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not deterministically displayed, the player can recognize that the variation of the effect symbol due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include a complete stop display of the effect symbol for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  For example, nine types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “9” or Chinese characters) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The number “1” to “nine”, English characters, nine character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters, symbols, and character images may be used. Other than these, it may be a decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure). A corresponding symbol number is attached to each of the effect symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “1” to “9” or numbers “1” to “9”, respectively. The production symbols are not limited to nine types, and any number may be used as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as combinations per special drawing or combinations that are out of place can be configured (for example, eight types or ten types). . In addition, as the effect symbols of the present embodiment, the first effect symbols (the effect symbols of alphanumeric characters “1” to “9”) in which the variable display is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the special symbols. And second effect symbols (Chinese numerals “1” to “nine”) in which the variable display is executed in conjunction with the variable symbol display are prepared in advance, and these are collectively referred to simply as “effect symbols”. Sometimes.

  From the start of the variation display of the effect symbols, until the finalized effect symbol that is the variation display result is derived and displayed, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R , For example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number sequentially flows from the smallest to the largest, and when the effect symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “9”) is displayed, The effect symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” effect symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number. When the effect symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the effect symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the effect display device 5, a first reserved storage display area 5D is arranged. In the first hold memory display area 5D, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (first special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the first special symbol in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the first starting winning opening formed by the first normal winning ball apparatus 6A described later. To do. In other words, the special start condition (also called “execution condition”) for executing the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is established, but the variable display based on the special start condition established previously is being executed, When the special start condition that allows the start of variable display is not satisfied because the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the game state per special figure (big hit game state) or the like, the special start condition that is satisfied (the first start winning prize) Fluctuation display corresponding to (winning to mouth) is suspended.

  In the present embodiment, the hold storage display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening is displayed in a round white display (the hold displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D). Memory display). Note that the display mode of the hold storage display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening may be a display mode other than the round white display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, a hold indicator 25 </ b> A for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is provided above the first special symbol display 4 </ b> A together with the first hold memory display area 5 </ b> D. The hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of memory for which the execution of the variable display using the first special figure is suspended.

  On the other hand, the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the second starting winning opening formed by the second normal winning ball device 6B is not held. For this reason, it is arranged in the display area of the hold display or the display area of the effect display device 5 where the hold storage display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the second special symbol (second special figure hold storage number) is specified. No second hold storage display area is provided. That is, the special start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol is established, but the special symbol and the effect symbol based on the previously established special start condition are displayed. When the special start condition that allows the start of the variable display is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the gaming state per special figure or the like, The variable display corresponding to “2 winning prize opening” is not held.

  Below the effect display device 5, a first normal winning ball device 6A is provided. A pass gate 41 is provided on the right side (right game area) of the effect display device 5, and a second normal winning ball device 6 </ b> B is provided below (directly below) the pass gate 41.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the first ordinary winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 2, and formed in the second ordinary winning ball apparatus 6B. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 "), the first start condition (special start condition) is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not being displayed. Alternatively, if the gaming state is not the gaming state per special figure, the second start condition (special start condition) is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variable display) so that it can be variably displayed.

  For example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2 is built in the passage gate 41, and a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Based on the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the game ball is not paid out as a prize ball, and is a normal start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for displaying a normal symbol or an effect symbol in a variable manner. Is established.

  The passing gate 41 does not generate a prize based on the passing (entering) of the game ball, and the variable display corresponding to the normal symbol is not held, so that the variable display corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed. There is no normal hold indicator that displays a hold memory display that displays the number of holds (normal symbol hold memory number) in an identifiable manner, or a normal hold memory display area that is arranged in the display area of the effect display device 5. In other words, the normal start condition for executing the normal display or the variation display of the effect design is established, but the normal change display based on the normal start condition established previously is being executed, or the normal display condition described later is controlled. When the normal start condition that allows the start of the variable display is not satisfied due to the fact that the variable display has been established, the variable display corresponding to the satisfied normal start condition (passing through the passage gate 41) is not held.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the second normal winning ball device 6 </ b> B is arranged at a position away from the passing gate 41. The distance from the passing gate 41 to the second start winning opening of the second normal winning ball apparatus 6B is about 1.5 to 2 times the diameter of the game ball (about 11 mm (diameter of the game ball) × 2 = about 22 mm). Therefore, game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 do not enter the second start winning opening and flow down to the second start winning opening, or game balls that have not passed through the passing gate 41 are second. There is also the possibility to enter the starting prize opening.

  However, since the second start winning opening of the second ordinary winning ball device 6B is arranged directly below the passing gate 41, most of the game balls that have passed through the passing gate 41 are directly in the second of the second ordinary winning ball device 6B. A game ball that enters (wins) the start winning opening and passes through the passing gate 41 does not enter the second starting winning opening and flows down to the second starting winning opening or does not pass through the passing gate 41 Has a very low probability of entering the second start winning opening (for example, about 1 in 1000 balls). In this way, on the right side of the effect display device 5 in the game area, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 enters the second start winning opening of the second normal winning ball device 6B that is disposed immediately below the passing gate 41. A possible game ball path is provided, and when one game ball passes through the game ball path, a special symbol special start condition and a normal symbol normal start condition can be established within a predetermined period.

  Further, since the second normal winning ball device 6B is disposed at a position away from the passing gate 41, the second normal winning ball device 6B is passed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the game ball has passed the passing gate 41. However, since this predetermined period is about 0.2 seconds, immediately after the normal symbol normal starting condition based on the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21 is established, the passing gate A special symbol special start condition based on the fact that the game ball that has passed 41 is detected by the second start port switch 22B is established.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball that has entered the passing gate 41 flows down the game area without being discharged out of the gaming machine, and enters the second start winning opening of the second normal winning ball device 6B. Is taken in and discharged out of the gaming machine. Further, since most of the game balls that have entered the passing gate 41 enter the second starting winning opening of the second normal winning ball apparatus 6B after about 0.2 seconds, when the game ball enters the passing gate 41, the normal symbol The change display of the normal symbol on the display 20 and the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B are started almost simultaneously.

  In the present embodiment, the second starting winning opening of the second normal winning ball apparatus 6B is arranged immediately below the passing gate 41. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and passes through the passing gate 41. If the game ball can pass through the second start winning opening, the second starting winning opening may not be directly under the passing gate 41 but may be arranged at a position shifted in the left-right direction with respect to the passing gate 41, for example. .

  In this embodiment, the distance between the passing gate 41 and the second start winning opening is about two game balls, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the passing gate 41 is not limited to this. As long as the passed game balls can pass through the second start winning opening within a predetermined period (for example, about 1 second), the separation distance may be two or more game balls or less than two game balls. If the separation distance is less than two, it is at least one game ball or more. If the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 does not enter the second start winning opening, or has passed through the passage gate 41. It is preferable that no game ball can enter the second start winning opening.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the first normal winning ball device 6A. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 that is used for the large winning opening door, and the large winning winning as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth. In the following, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 may be referred to as “special electric accessory” or simply “special electric power”.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Accordingly, when the special winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special winning hole, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  An ordinary variable winning ball device 27 is provided on the right side of the first normal winning ball device 6A. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 includes a normal winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81 for a normal winning opening door, and forms an ordinary winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state by the normal winning opening door. . In the following description, the normally variable winning ball apparatus may be referred to as “ordinary electric accessory” or simply abbreviated as “general power”.

  As an example, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27, when the solenoid 81 for the normal winning opening door is in the OFF state, the normal winning opening door closes the normal winning opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the normal winning opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 for the normal prize opening door is in the ON state, the normal prize opening door opens the normal prize opening to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the normal prize opening. As described above, the normal winning opening changes into an open state in which a game ball can easily pass (enter) and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous for the player. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the normal winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) through the normal winning opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the normal winning opening is detected by, for example, a winning opening switch 24 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the winning port switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the normal winning opening that has been opened in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27, the game ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the normal winning opening is opened in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27, the game ball can enter the normal winning opening, and the first normal state is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the normal winning opening is closed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a winning ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the normal winning opening. It becomes a disadvantageous second normal state.

  In addition, an open notification unit 36A that emits light by turning on the open notification LED 36 is provided around the normal winning opening, and the normal winning opening emits light during an open period in which the long winning pattern described later is open. It is like that. In this embodiment, the open notification LED 36 can be lit in a plurality of emission colors, and starts emitting blue light when the normal winning opening is in an open state with a long open pattern. When the game ball passes through the second start winning opening, the emission color changes from blue to red. In this embodiment, the opening notification unit 36A is provided so as to surround the normal winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is recognized that the normal winning opening is in an open state. As long as it is possible, it does not necessarily have to be provided so as to surround the normal winning opening. For example, when the opening notification LED 36 provided inside the normal winning opening is turned on, the normal winning opening door emits light. You may do it.

  Further, a right-handed notification LED 37 is provided between the first normal winning ball device 6A and the special variable winning ball device 7, and when the right-handed notification LED 37 is turned on, a game is entered in the right game area. A firing promotion notification is made to urge the ball to fire. In the present embodiment, the right-handed notification LED 37 is provided below the first ordinary winning ball device 6A and above the special variable winning ball device 7b. For example, the position may be provided above or below the normal variable winning ball device 27 or around the effect display device 5.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 can enter the second start winning opening of the second normal winning ball device 6B that is disposed immediately below the passing gate 41. A route is provided, and an LED 38 for passing effect is provided in an area of the game board surface along the game ball route. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the passing effect LED 38 is provided between the passing effect LEDs 38a and 38b provided above the passing gate 41, and between the passing gate 41 and the second normal winning ball apparatus 6B. It is composed of three LED devices, an LED 38c for passage effect.

  As will be described later, the on-pass performance LEDs 38a and 38b above the passing gate 41 are switched from the lit state to the unlit state when the game ball enters the second start winning opening in the high base state, and the passing gate 41 The LED 38c at the time of passing below (above the second normal winning ball device 6B) switches from the lighting state to the blinking state when the game ball enters the second start winning opening in the high base state.

  In addition, each LED which constitutes the LED 38 for passing effect may be provided not at a position along the game ball path but at a position beside the passing gate 41 or the second normal winning ball device 6B, for example. Further, each LED constituting the LED for passing effect 38 is not limited to the substantially triangular shape shown in FIGS. 1 and 55, but may be other shapes such as a circle or a character, and each has a different shape. There may be. A plurality of LEDs may form a single shape (for example, a specific word or an ellipse surrounding the passing gate 41 and the second normal winning ball device 6B). Further, the number of LEDs constituting the passage effect LED 38 is not limited to three, but may be other numbers (for example, 1 or 2, or 4 or more).

  In addition, an LED 39 for notification of the number of balls is provided above the effect display device 5. The number-of-balls notification LED 39 is composed of five 7-segment LEDs each corresponding to 1 digit to 10000 digits. The number-of-balls notification LED 39 displays an advantageous zone prize ball number which is a total value of the number of prize balls paid out to the player in an advantageous zone (fourth game state or fifth game state) described later. It has become. The number-of-balls notification LED 39 may be provided not at the top of the effect display device 5 but at another position (for example, in the vicinity of the normal variable winning ball device 27).

  At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port 26 into which a game ball that has not entered any winning port is taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a frame LED 9 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area. In the following description, the frame LED 9, the above-described opening notification LED 36, right-handed notification LED 37, the passing effect LED 38, and the ball number notification LED 39 may be collectively referred to as an effect LED.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to the lower plate member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). ing. The upper plate member that forms the upper plate includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the game area is divided into a left game area on the left side and a right game area on the right side of the center decoration frame surrounding the periphery of the effect display device 5 disposed at a substantially central position of the game area. A game ball that has been launched weakly by the batting operation handle (left-handed) flows down the first path in the left game area, and a game ball that has been launched strongly by the batting operation handle (right-handed) is the second in the right game area. It is designed to flow down the route.

  A first general winning ball apparatus 28 is provided in the left game area. In the example of FIG. 1, the first general winning ball device 28 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 5 and at the upper left of the first normal winning ball device 6A. The first general winning ball apparatus 28 is formed with a first general winning opening, and the game balls launched into the left game area flow down the first path and win the first general winning opening at a predetermined rate. . A second general winning ball device 29 is provided in the right game area. In the example of FIG. 1, the second general winning ball device 29 is provided below the second ordinary winning ball device 6 </ b> B and above the normal variable winning ball device 27. The second general winning ball apparatus 29 is formed with a second general winning hole, and the game balls launched into the right game area flow down the second path to win the second general winning hole at a predetermined rate. . In the following description, the first general winning opening and the second general winning opening may be collectively referred to as “general winning opening”.

  Unlike the big prize opening and the normal prize opening, the general prize opening is not composed of a variable prize ball device, and is not a prize opening that can be switched between an open state and a closed state, and is always open. Further, even when a game ball enters the general winning opening, the start condition for the special symbol variation display is not satisfied, and the start condition for the normal symbol variation display is not satisfied.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the first general winning ball opening formed in the first general winning ball device 28 is detected by, for example, the general winning port switch 28A shown in FIG. 2 and formed in the second general winning ball device 29. The game ball that has passed (entered) through the second general prize opening is detected by, for example, the general prize opening switch 29A shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded based on the fact that the game balls are detected by the general game port switch 28A corresponding to the first general game port and the general game port switch 29A corresponding to the second general game port. It is paid out as a ball. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game balls by the general prize opening switch 28A corresponding to the first general prize opening, and the game balls by the general prize opening switch 29A corresponding to the second general prize opening. The number of award balls to be paid out based on the detection of may be the same or different.

  The game balls that have flowed down the first path in the left game area can win the first ordinary winning ball apparatus 6A, the first general winning ball apparatus 28, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, and the second path in the right gaming area. The game balls that have flowed down can pass through the passing gate 41 and can win the second ordinary winning ball device 6B and the second general winning ball device 29, and the ordinary variable winning ball device 27 and the special variable winning ball device 7. A number of obstacle nails are arranged so that In other words, in the case of left-handed, it is impossible to pass through the passing gate 41, and it is impossible to win the second ordinary winning ball device 6B, the second general winning ball device 29, and the ordinary variable winning ball device 27. In the present embodiment, a large number of obstacle nails are arranged so that most of the game balls launched into the right game area and flowing down the second path pass through the passage gate 41. That is, the second start winning opening of the second normal winning ball apparatus 6B is provided with a number of obstacle nails so that the game ball can enter more easily than the first starting winning opening of the first normal winning ball apparatus 6A. .

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 executes a normal symbol variation display such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2. Normal symbol display based on the fact that the normal diagram start condition for starting the normal symbol variation display is satisfied, for example, that the previous variation variation display has been completed The normal symbol variation display by the vessel 20 is started.

  In the normal symbol variation display, after the normal symbol variation is started, when a predetermined time which is the normal symbol variation time has elapsed, the fixed normal symbol which is the normal symbol variation display result is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (symbol per symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the winning symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is “displaced”. It becomes. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variation display result is “per normal”, the opening control of the normal winning opening door of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 is performed, and the closing control is performed when a predetermined time elapses.

  After the first special start condition is established by detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the first normal winning ball apparatus 6A by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. For example, based on the fact that the first special start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the end of the previous special figure game or the gaming state per special figure, the special figure variable display by the first special symbol display 4A is started. In addition, the second special start condition is satisfied by the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the second normal winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. When established, for example, based on the fact that the second special start condition is established due to, for example, the previous special figure change display or the gaming state per special figure being completed, the special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. The change display of is started.

  In the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, after the variation display time as the special symbol variation time has elapsed after starting the variation display of the special symbol, A definite special symbol (variation display result) that is a variation display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (a symbol per special symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the special display result is “per special symbol” (big hit). Further, if a special symbol different from the symbol per special symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes “out”. When a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the special symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, the “small hit” as a predetermined display result may be obtained.

  After the variation display result in the variation display of the special figure becomes “per special figure”, per special figure as a specific gaming state in which a round (also referred to as “round game”) in which the special winning opening is opened is executed a predetermined number of times. Controlled to gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating numbers “0” to “9” is a symbol per special symbol, and a special symbol indicating a symbol “−” is used as an off symbol. In addition, each symbol such as the symbol per special symbol or the symbol out of the special symbol in the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A is different from each symbol in the variation display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B. Alternatively, the special symbol common to the variation display of both special symbols may be a symbol per special symbol or an off symbol.

  The special winning symbol of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is won in the gaming state per special symbol after the special symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as the special display result in the special symbol variable display and becomes “per special symbol” as the specific display result. In the period until a predetermined upper limit time (e.g., 0.016 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of winning balls are generated, the grand prize opening is opened. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  The grand prize opening door that opened the grand prize opening during the execution of the round changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the second state which is disadvantageous to the player by closing the grand prize opening thereafter. To complete one round. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “2” or the like). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled to be released based on the special electric accessory release pattern when the display result of the special symbol variation display is per special figure. As shown in FIG. 13, in the opening control based on the special electric accessory opening pattern, the period during which the special winning opening is opened is 0.016 seconds in each round, and the round interval period after the end of the first round is 0. .1 second, the round interval period after the end of the second round is 0.6 seconds, and the period during which the opening control based on the special electric accessory opening pattern is executed is 0.732 seconds in total.

  Note that the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state of the big prize opening) is relatively short (for example, 0.016 seconds) is also referred to as a short-term opening round. In this embodiment, for all types of special charts to be described later, it is a short-term opening round in which a large winning opening is opened for a short time (for example, 0.016 seconds) in one round. It is difficult to win a ball (prize ball).

  In the present embodiment, when the variation display result in the special figure game is “per special figure” and the game state is controlled per special figure, after the end, the range of a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 1 time, 100 times, until the next special drawing), the high base state in which the high base control is performed and the low base state in which the high base control is not performed are controlled. In the high base control, after the gaming state per special figure is finished, the special figure is displayed in a predetermined number of times (for example, once or 100 times), and the fluctuation display result is “per special figure”. It suffices to end when one of the conditions is satisfied first. In this embodiment, the high base control is performed, so that the fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation time) in the special figure fluctuation display is not shortened compared to the normal state, but may be shortened. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a game state per special figure, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the case where the initialization process is executed later is performed.

  When high-base control is performed, the control that improves the probability that the fluctuation display result of the fluctuation display of each time in the normal map will be "per normal map" than in the low base state, the fluctuation display result is "per normal map" Control that is advantageous to the player is performed such that the opening control time for performing the opening control of the normal winning opening door in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the fact that the player has become is longer than that in the low base state. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the normal winning opening along with the high base control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as “high opening control”. As the high opening control, any one of the above-described controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all) may be performed in combination. By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the normal winning opening being opened is higher than when the high opening control is not performed, and thus the probability of occurrence of the normal winning is increased. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a “high opening control period”, and this period may be the same as the period during which the high base control is performed.

  In this embodiment, the variation time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B and the normal variation variation display by the normal symbol display 20 are shown. We do not implement control to make the change time (normal figure change time) shorter than in the low base state, but the special figure change time (special figure change time) and the normal figure change time (normal figure change time) You may make it implement control which makes it shorter than the time of a low base state.

  The normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 executes the release control based on the normal electric accessory release pattern when the display result of the change display of the normal symbol is per normal figure. As shown in FIG. 14, there are a short opening pattern and a long opening pattern in the ordinary electric accessory opening pattern. As shown in FIG. 14 (A), in the short opening pattern, the opening period of the normal winning opening is 0.06 seconds, and the subsequent interval period is 0.776 seconds. The total period during which control is executed is 0.836 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), the long open pattern has a normal winning opening opening period of 4.2 seconds and a subsequent interval period of 0.776 seconds. The total period during which the opening control based on the pattern is executed is 4.976 seconds.

  As described above, when the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the short opening pattern is executed, the opening period of the normal winning opening is short, and it is difficult to win the game ball, so it is difficult to win the game (award). Ball) cannot be expected, but when the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long opening pattern is executed, the opening period of the normal winning opening is longer than that in the case of the short opening pattern, Since it is possible to win 3 to 5 game balls, it is possible to expect a winning ball (prize ball).

  In addition, the normal electric accessory release pattern is not determined by the variation pattern of ordinary symbols per ordinary figure or the type of hit of ordinary symbols. Depending on whether the gaming state is a high base state, the short opening pattern or the long opening pattern is determined. Specifically, when the game state at the time when the display change of the normal symbol whose display result is per ordinary figure is finished is not the high base state, that is, the base state is the low base state, the normal electric accessory release pattern is shown in FIG. When the short open pattern shown in (A) is set, and the game state at the time when the display of the normal symbol fluctuation display with the display result per unit is finished is the high base state, the normal electric accessory release pattern is shown in FIG. The long open pattern shown in B) is set.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the display result per special figure is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the special symbol and controlled to the gaming state per special figure, the opening control of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is executed. The opening control based on the special electric accessory opening pattern is a short-term opening round in which a large winning opening is opened for a short time (for example, 0.016 seconds) in one round, and the opening control is substantially difficult to win a game ball. Because there is, you can not expect to win a prize ball. On the other hand, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the high base state, the occurrence frequency per ordinary figure is high, and when it is per common figure, the opening control based on the long opening pattern of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27. It is possible to acquire many balls (prize balls). In other words, because it is per base figure in the high base state, it is possible to acquire more balls (prize balls) than when the special symbol variation display result is per special figure. The high base state is more advantageous than the gaming state per figure.

  A gaming state in which both high base control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which high base control and high opening control are performed together with probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. Further, the probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the high base control and the high opening control are not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. Also, only the gaming state in which high base control and high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”. is there. On the other hand, the probability variation state (high accuracy low base state) in which only the probability variation control is performed and the high base control and the high release control are not performed is also referred to as the probability variation state without the high base to distinguish it from the high accuracy high base state. is there. The high base state in which the high base control and the high opening control are performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as the low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the high base control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of high base control and probability variation control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special figure game can be executed frequently, and the fluctuation display result in each special figure game is “per special figure”. As a result, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state advantageous to a player that is different from the gaming state per special figure is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  As described above, the high opening control increases the frequency of the normal winning opening being opened. Therefore, in the high base state, the game ball is made to enter the passing gate 41 by making a right strike, and the left winning is made. However, since the high opening control is not performed in the low base state, it is not advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the passing gate 41 by hitting right.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and an LED control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board 91, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. In order to output an error signal from the output circuit 111 for transmitting the solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82, the game control microcomputer 100, a special signal per special figure, a special signal, and an advantageous state signal to be described later. The information output circuit 64 for transmitting to the information terminal board 91 is mounted.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the effect display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a right-handed notification notification. An LED control command used for controlling the lighting operation of an effect LED such as the LED 37 is included.

  FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3, the command 80XXH designates a normal symbol variation that designates a variation pattern (variable display time) of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 5 in response to the normal symbol variation display in the regular game. This is a pattern specification command. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the normal symbol variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated. Command 81XXH is a special symbol designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as an effect symbol (first effect symbol to be described later) that is variably displayed on the effect display device 5 in response to the change display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command.

  The command 82XXH is a special symbol change start command for designating the start of change in a special figure game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B.

  The command 8BXXH is a normal symbol variation display result designation command for designating a normal symbol variation display result, and is an effect control command for designating a variation display result such as a normal symbol or an effect symbol (second effect symbol described later). In the normal symbol variation display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (A), according to the determination result (predetermined result) whether the variation display result is “out of” or “per standard”, Different EXT data is set.

  In the normal symbol variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4A, the command 8B00H is a first ordinary symbol variation display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variation display result is “out”. is there. The command 8B01H is a second normal symbol variation display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variation display result is “per special figure”.

  The command 8CXXH is a special symbol variation display result notification command for designating a special symbol variation display result, and is an effect control command for designating a variation display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol (first effect symbol described later). In the special fluctuation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, a decision result (predetermined result) whether the fluctuation display result is “out of” or “per special figure”, or a fluctuation display result. Different EXT data is set according to a determination result (type determination result per special figure) of which one of a plurality of special figure types is selected when “is per special figure”.

  In the special symbol variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the command 8C00H is a first special symbol variation display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variation display result is “out”. is there. The command 8C01H is a second special symbol variation display result designation command for notifying a predetermination result that the variation display result is “per special figure” and the type per special figure is “non-probable variation A”, and the type decision result per special figure. It is. Command 8C02H is a third special symbol variation display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variation display result is “per special figure” and the type per special figure is “non-probable variation B”, and the type decision result per special figure. It is. Command 8C03H is a fourth special symbol variation display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variation display result is “per special figure” and the type per special figure is “non-probable variation C”, and the type decision result per special figure. It is. Command 8C04H is a fifth special symbol variation display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variation display result is “per special figure” and the type per special figure is “non-probable variation D” and the type decision result per special figure. It is. Command 8C05H is a sixth special symbol variation display for notifying the result of prior determination and the type determination result per special figure that the fluctuation display result is “per special figure” and the type per special figure is “non-certain change E” special figure. This is a result specification command. Command 8C06H is a seventh special symbol variation display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variation display result is “per special figure” and the type per special figure is “non-probable variation F” and the type decision result per special figure. It is. Command 8C07H is an eighth special symbol variation display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result indicating that the variation display result is “per special figure” and the type per special figure is “probability variation A” and the type determined result per special figure. is there. The command 8C08H is a ninth special symbol variation display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variation display result is “per special figure” and the type per special figure is “probability variation B” and the type decision result per special figure. is there. Command 8C09H is a tenth special symbol variation display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variation display result is “per special figure” and the type per special figure is “probable variation C”, and the type decision result per special figure. is there. The command 8C0AH is an eleventh special symbol variation display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variation display result is “per special figure” and the type per special figure is “probability variation D”, and the type decision result per special figure. is there. Command 8C0BH is a twelfth special symbol variation display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variation display result is “per special figure” and the type per special figure is “probability variation E” and the type decision result per special figure. is there.

  The command 8D00H is a normal symbol confirmation designation command for notifying that the change display of the normal symbol and the effect symbol is stopped. The command 8F00H is a special symbol confirmation designation command for notifying that the change display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is stopped.

  The command 9000H is an initialization (power-on) designation command that designates display of an initial screen when power is turned on. Command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command for designating display of a power failure recovery screen at the time of power failure recovery. The command 9300H is an error designation command that designates that an error indicated by the EXT data has occurred.

  The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to the first gaming state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither high base control nor probability variation control is performed, and command 9501H is probability variation control. The second gaming state designation command corresponding to the second gaming state (high probability low base state) that is performed and high base control is not performed, and the command 9502H is the third gaming state in which high variation control is performed without probability variation control ( The third gaming state designation command corresponding to the low probability high base state), and the command 9503H is designated as the fourth gaming state corresponding to the fourth gaming state (low probability high base state) in which the high base control is performed without the probability variation control. The fifth game state designation piece corresponding to the fifth game state (high probability high base state) in which the command 9504H is used as a command and the probability variation control and the high base control are performed. And de. The command 9FXXXH is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration display.

  The command 9C01H is a right-handed lighting start designation command for designating start of lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37. The right-handed lighting start designation command is used when the fluctuation display result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol executed in the low base state is “per special figure” and the type per special figure is the probability variation B or the non-probability variation B ( That is, in the case of the type per special figure that shifts to the high base state after the game state per special figure ends, it is transmitted as a set together with the start designation command (command A0XXH) per special figure. Upon receiving the right-handed lighting start designation command, the effect control CPU 120 immediately outputs a control signal for lighting the right-handed notification LED 37.

  In this embodiment, when the fluctuation display result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol executed in the low base state is “per special figure”, the type per special figure is the probability variation A or the non-probability variation A (special diagram). The right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted in the case of a special figure type in which the low base state continues after the winning game state is finished, and the special figure type is a probability change B or a non-probable change B (a game state per special figure). The right-handed lighting start designation command (command 9C01H) is transmitted only in the case of the type per special figure that shifts to the high base state after the completion). When the result is “per special figure”, a right-handed lighting start designation command (command 9C01H) may be transmitted regardless of the special figure type.

  The command 9C00H is a right-handed lighting end designation command for designating that the right-handed notification LED 37 is turned on. The right-handed lighting end designation command is controlled to a low base state after the game state per special figure (after the special figure end effect on the production control board side) (in the case of probability variation A, non-probability variation A, non-probability variation E ) At the timing when the gaming state per special figure ends (timing at which the end effect per special figure ends on the effect control board side). In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, when the high base state is controlled after the gaming state per special figure, the variation display result does not become “per special figure” a predetermined number of times (for example, the third gaming state). In the fourth game state, when the special game variable display is executed, the high base state ends and the low base state is entered. In this case, a right-handed lighting end designation command is transmitted 900 ms after the fixed special symbol (variation display result) of the variation display of the special diagram of the predetermined number of times (for example, once or 100th) is derived and displayed. Shall be. Upon receiving the right-handed lighting end designation command, the effect control CPU 120 immediately outputs a control signal for turning off the right-handed notification LED 37.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image (fanfare effect image per special figure) indicating the start of the gaming state per special figure. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening designation command that designates display of an effect image indicating that the special winning opening is open for the number of times indicated by the EXT data in the gaming state per special figure. The command A2XXH is a designation command after opening the big prize opening that designates display of the effect image indicating that the opening period of the big prize opening of the number of times indicated by the EXT data in the gaming state per special figure has ended. Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image (ending effect image per special figure) at the end of the gaming state per special figure.

  In the special designation start designation command and special figure termination designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command is set. May be set. Alternatively, in the special designation start designation command or special figure end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the special symbol type decision result and the set EXT data is different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. You may make it let. In the special winning opening opening designation command and the special winning opening open designation command, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the gaming state per special figure (for example, “1”, “2”). .

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first starting prize is generated when the first starting prize switch 22A detects the gaming ball that has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the first normal winning ball apparatus 6A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure on the one special symbol display 4A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the second normal winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a second start winning is generated. 2 is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the special symbol display 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number designation command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the like. The first reserved memory number designation command is, for example, when the first start slot winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning slot and the first start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved memory number designation command is transmitted in response to the start of execution of the special game when the first start condition is satisfied (when the reserved memory number decreases). May be.

  The command C6XXH is a normal electric accessory winning designation command for designating display of an effect image indicating that ten gaming balls have been paid out based on the winning of the gaming balls to the ordinary variable winning ball device 27. The command C7XXH is a gate passage designation command for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  The command C8XXH is a normal electric accessory release start designation command for designating the opening start of the normally variable winning ball device 27 by the release pattern indicated by the EXT data. The command C9XXH is a normal electric accessory opening end specifying command for specifying the opening end of the normally variable winning ball device 27 by the opening pattern indicated by the EXT data. In the ordinary electric accessory release start designation command and the ordinary electric accessory release end designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the opening pattern type of the normal variable winning ball device 27 described later. As a specific example, the command C800H is a normal electric actor opening start designation command corresponding to a later-described ordinary electric short opening pattern, and the command C801H is an ordinary electric actor opening start designation command corresponding to a later-described ordinary electric long opening pattern. And Further, the command C900H is an ordinary electric accessory opening end designation command corresponding to a later-described ordinary electric short opening pattern, and the command C901H is an ordinary electric actor opening end designation command corresponding to a later-described ordinary electric long opening pattern.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type per special figure, and for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern. Numeric data representing the random number MR3, the random number MR4 for determining the normal display result, the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4, and the random value MR6 for determining the normal variation pattern are controlled to be countable. . In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random number values MR1 to MR6 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of a normal symbol. In this embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state is any of the first to fifth gaming states described later, the normal symbol variation pattern when the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display result is “ A normal symbol variation pattern in the case of “per common figure” is prepared. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “out of” is referred to as an extraordinary fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is per a common figure is referred to as a fluctuation pattern per universal figure. Is done. In addition, the extraordinary deviation variation pattern (FPA1-1) and the ordinary variation variation pattern (FPA2-1) are each set with a special diagram variation time of 2.7 seconds (2700 ms).

  In the present embodiment, one variation pattern having the same special diagram variation time is prepared as the variation variation pattern and the variation pattern per variation, but each variation variation of the variation display is represented as a variation variation pattern. A plurality of variation patterns with different times may be prepared, or a plurality of variation patterns with different variation times of variation display may be prepared as a variation pattern per common map.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of special symbols. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the first gaming state (low probability low base state) described later, each of the cases where the special symbol variation display result is “out of” and “per special figure”. Corresponding to the above, a plurality of variation patterns whose variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and a plurality of variation patterns whose “reach” is prepared are prepared in advance.

  In addition, when the gaming state is the second gaming state (highly accurate low base state) described later, the variation display mode of the effect symbol is corresponding to the case where the variation display result of the special symbol is “per special diagram”. A plurality of variation patterns that are “non-reach” and a plurality of variation patterns that are “reach” are prepared in advance.

  The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” is a special diagram non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “special diagram non-reach deviation variation pattern”) The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “reach” is a special figure reach variation pattern (also referred to as “special figure reach variation pattern”). Called. In addition, the special figure non-reach fluctuation pattern and the special figure reach fluctuation pattern are included in the deviation fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result of the special symbol is “out of”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “per special figure” is referred to as a fluctuation pattern per special figure.

  The special figure reach variation pattern includes a special figure normal reach change pattern in which a reach reach effect of normal reach is executed, and a special figure super reach change pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of special figure normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the case of super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of special figure normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in the special figure super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more special figure super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  The special figure fluctuation time of the special figure normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach of the normal reach in the special symbol fluctuation display is executed is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β which are the special figure super reach fluctuation patterns. In addition, for the special figure fluctuation time of the special figure super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach reach execution such as super reach α and super reach β is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of the super reach β is executed, The special figure variation time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

  In the special figure variation pattern, the expectation level per special figure is set such that the variation display result of the special symbol is “per special figure” in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach. Also, in the special figure reach fluctuation pattern, since the special symbol fluctuation display result is “per special figure” in order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the expectation level per special figure is set higher. In the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the expectation level per special figure increases as the variation time increases.

  Note that the special figure non-reach variation pattern (TPA5-1) indicates that the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” when the variation display result of the second special symbol is “out” in the first gaming state. A special figure non-reach fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern, and the special figure non-reach fluctuation pattern (TPB1-1) indicates that the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol in the first gaming state or the second gaming state is "Special figure. In the case of “winning”, the variation display form of the special symbol non-reach variation pattern in which the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” is used.

  In the case where the gaming state is a third gaming state (low-probability base state) described later, the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” in response to the case where the variation display result of the special symbol is “out”. The special symbol non-reach variation pattern (TPA3-1) is prepared, and the variation display mode of the production symbol is “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the special symbol variation display result is “per special diagram”. A plurality of special figure non-reach fluctuation patterns (TPB 3-1-2) are prepared. These special figure non-reach fluctuation patterns (TPA3-1, TPB3-1 and 2) are set to 60 seconds (60000 ms) as the special figure fluctuation time.

  When the gaming state is a fourth gaming state (low-probability high-base state), which will be described later, and when the change display result of the special symbol becomes “out” in the first variation after the transition to the fourth gaming state. Correspondingly, when the special symbol non-reach variation pattern (TPA4-1) having the variation display mode of the effect symbol of “non-reach” is prepared and the variation display result of the special symbol becomes “out” after the second variation. Corresponding to the above, a special figure non-reach fluctuation pattern (TPA4-2) in which the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” is prepared. In addition, in the case of the 4th game state (low probability high base state), it corresponds to the case where the change display result of the special symbol becomes “per special figure” at the first change after the transition to the 4th game state. Then, a plurality of special figure non-reach fluctuation patterns (TPB4-1) in which the fluctuation display mode of the production symbol is “non-reach” are prepared, and the fluctuation display result of the special symbol is “per special figure” after the second fluctuation. Corresponding to the case, a plurality of special figure non-reach variation patterns (TPB4-2) having a variation display mode of the effect symbol of “non-reach” are prepared. The special figure non-reach fluctuation pattern (TPA4-1, TPB4-1) corresponding to the first fluctuation is set to 60 seconds (60000 ms) as the special figure fluctuation time, respectively, and the special figure non-reach corresponding to the second and subsequent fluctuations. In the fluctuation pattern (TPA4-2, TPB4-2), 10 seconds (10000 ms) is set as the special figure fluctuation time.

  In the case where the gaming state is a fifth gaming state (highly accurate high base state) described later, the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-display” corresponding to the case where the variation display result of the special symbol is “per special diagram”. Special figure non-reach fluctuation patterns (TPBs 5-1 to 5) which are “reach” are prepared. In the special figure non-reach fluctuation pattern (TPA5-1 to 3), 20 seconds (20000 ms) is set as the special figure fluctuation time. In the special figure non-reach fluctuation pattern (TPB5-4), the special figure fluctuation time is set. 2.4 seconds (2400 ms) is set, and in the special figure non-reach fluctuation pattern (TPA5-5), a special figure fluctuation time of 2.8 seconds (2800 ms) is set.

  The special figure non-reach variation patterns (TPBs 5-1 to TP3) are variation patterns corresponding to the case where the opening control of the normal variable winning ball device 27 based on the normal electric accessory release pattern is not executed. On the other hand, the special figure non-reach fluctuation pattern (TPA5-4) is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the ordinary electric short opening pattern is executed. The special figure non-reach fluctuation pattern (TPB5-5) is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the ordinary electric long opening pattern is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, these special symbol fluctuation patterns, for example, only the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining the types such as non-reach, normal reach, and super reach first. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and these variations are determined. The variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after first determining the variation pattern type from the random number value for pattern type determination.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and various symbols in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. Table data constituting a variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns that are the variation modes is stored.

  Next, various determination tables stored in the ROM 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 7A and 7B are explanatory diagrams showing a low probability special symbol display result determination table and FIG. 7B a high probability special symbol display result determination table. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a low base normal symbol display result determination table, and FIG. 8B is a high base normal symbol display result determination table. FIG. 9A is a type determination table A per special figure used in the first gaming state, and FIG. 9B is a type determination table B per special figure used in the second gaming state. Special figure type determination table C used in the third gaming state, (D) is a special figure type determination table D used in the fourth gaming state, and (E) is in the fifth gaming state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the kind determination table E per special figure used.

  The low-special special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 7A and the high-special special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 7B use the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A. Before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game or the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B, the variation display result is set to “per special symbol”. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the gaming state per special figure based on the random value MR1 for special figure display result determination.

  The low-accuracy special symbol display result determination table is a table used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low-probability, that is, a non-probability change state (low-probability state) in which the probability change control is not performed. The symbol display result determination table is a table used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is highly probable, that is, in a probability changing state (high probability state) in which probability changing control is performed.

  In the low-accuracy special symbol display result determination table, determination values of 0 to 9174 are assigned per special drawing, and the remaining determination values of 9175 to 65535 are assigned to the outliers. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy special symbol display result determination table, all the determination values from 0 to 65535 are assigned per special figure, and no determination value is assigned to the deviation. When the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the special symbol shown in FIG. 7 (A) or FIG. 7 (B), the CPU 103 per special symbol (non-probable variation A to non-probable variation). F, probability variation A to probability variation E). Therefore, when the probability is low, the player wins a special figure with a probability (ratio) of 14/100, and when the person is highly accurate, the player wins a special figure with a probability (ratio) of 100/100 (no loss). As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined that the special figure display result is “per special figure” and the gaming state per special figure is controlled in the low probability state. Compared to the probability (about 14/100 in this embodiment), the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “per special figure” and controlling the gaming state per special figure is higher (in this embodiment about 100/100). 100). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state (high probability state), the game state per special figure is controlled as compared to the case of the non-probability variation state (low probability state). In order to increase the probability of determination (including a probability of 1/1), the determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the gaming state per special figure.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether or not to use the special symbol using the low-accuracy special symbol display result determination table or the high-accuracy special symbol display result determination table. You may make it carry out using a separate table by the case where it is a variable display of a 1st special symbol, and the case where it is a variable display of a 2nd special symbol by a variable special symbol designation | designated buffer.

  FIG. 9 shows an example of the configuration of the special figure type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The type determination table per special figure in this embodiment is based on the random number MR2 for type determination per special figure when it is determined that the special figure display result is “per special figure” and controlled in the gaming state per special figure. It is a table referred to in order to determine the type per special figure as one of a plurality of types. Among these, in the special symbol type determination table shown in FIGS. 9 (A) to 9 (E), the special symbol on which variation display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (first special symbol display 4A). Depending on whether it is a special figure game) or a second special figure (special game by the second special symbol display 4B), a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for type determination per special figure ) Are assigned to a plurality of types per special figure such as “non-probability change A to F” and “probability change A to E”.

  Here, the types per special figure in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 6. In this embodiment, the first game state (low probability low) described later after the game per special figure is used as the type per special figure. Non-probability change A and non-probability change E controlled in the base state), probability change A controlled in the second game state (high-probability low base state) to be described later after the game per special figure, and game per special figure Non-probability change B controlled to the third gaming state (low probability high base state) to be described later after the end, and to the fourth gaming state (low probability high base state) to be described later after the game per special figure. Non-probability change C, non-probability change D, and non-probability change F, and probability changes B to E that are controlled in a fifth game state (highly accurate high base state) to be described later after the game per special figure are set. In this embodiment, the special figure is determined regardless of the type of special figure, such as “non-probability change A to F” (per non-probability change special figure) or “probability change A to E” (per probabilistic change figure). In the winning game state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is subjected to release control based on the special electric accessory release pattern (short-term release round) (see FIG. 13).

  The high base control executed after the game state per special figure of non-probability B is executed a predetermined number of times (one time in this embodiment) after the game state per special figure is finished. Or it ends when it becomes a gaming state per special figure. Further, the high base control executed after the end of the game state per special figure of non-probability change C, non-probability change D and non-probability change F is a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) after the end of the game state per special figure. ) Is executed, or the game is ended by entering the gaming state per special figure before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. Further, the high-accuracy control and the high-base control executed after the game state per special figure of the probability variation B to E is continuously executed until the special figure hit occurs again after the game state per special figure is finished. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in the special figure type determination table A (for the first special symbol), 0 to 11 are assigned to the non-probability B in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 999. 12 to 19 are assigned to probability variation B, and 20 to 999 are assigned to probability variation A. For this reason, when a special figure hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol in the first gaming state, the game state is controlled to the second gaming state after the game per special figure at a rate of about 98%. Yes. On the other hand, in the special symbol type determination table (for the second special symbol), in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 999, 0 to 11 are assigned to non-probability variation A, and 12 to 999 are probability variation A. Assigned. For this reason, when a special figure hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol in the first gaming state, it is controlled to the second gaming state (low base state) after the game per special figure is finished at a rate of about 98%. It has become so.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, in the special figure type determination table B (for the first special symbol), 0 to 9 are assigned to the non-probability variation A in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 999. 10 to 11 are assigned to non-probability variation B, 12 to 13 are assigned to probability variation B, and 14 to 999 are assigned to probability variation A. For this reason, when a special symbol hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol in the second gaming state, the game is controlled to the second gaming state after the game per special symbol at the rate of about 98% (second gaming). The state continues.) On the other hand, in the special symbol type determination table (for the second special symbol), in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 999, 0 to 11 are assigned to non-probability variation A, and 12 to 999 are probability variation A. Assigned. For this reason, when a special figure hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol in the second gaming state, the game is controlled to the second gaming state (low base state) after the game per special figure is finished at a rate of about 98%. (The second gaming state continues).

  As shown in FIG. 9C, in the special figure type determination table C (for the first special symbol), 0 to 11 are assigned to the non-probability variable C in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 999. , 12 to 999 are assigned to the probability variation C. For this reason, when a special figure hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol in the third gaming state, the game state is controlled to the fifth gaming state after the game per special figure is finished at a rate of about 98%. Yes. On the other hand, in the special symbol type determination table (for the second special symbol), in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 999, 0 to 11 are assigned to non-probability C, and 12 to 999 are probability C. Assigned. For this reason, when a special figure hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol in the third gaming state, the game state is controlled to the fifth gaming state after the game per special figure is finished at a rate of about 98%. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 9D, in the special figure type determination table D (for the first special symbol), 0 to 11 are assigned to the non-probability variation D in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 999. , 12 to 999 are assigned to the probability variation D. For this reason, when a special symbol hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol in the fourth gaming state, the game state is controlled to the fifth gaming state after the game per special symbol at a rate of about 98%. Yes. On the other hand, in the special symbol type determination table (for the second special symbol), in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 999, 0 to 11 are assigned to non-probability C, and 12 to 999 are probability C. Assigned. For this reason, when a special figure hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol in the fourth gaming state, the game state is controlled to the fifth gaming state after the game per special figure is finished at a rate of about 98%. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 9E, in the special figure type determination table E (for the first special symbol), 0 to 1 are assigned to the non-probability variation F in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 999. , 2 to 989 are assigned to probability variation E, and 990 to 999 are assigned to non-probability variation E. For this reason, when a special symbol hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol in the fifth gaming state, the game state is controlled to the fifth gaming state after the game per special symbol at a rate of about 98%. Yes. On the other hand, in the special symbol type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 is assigned to the non-probability variation F and 1 to 988 is allocated to the probability variation E in the range 0 to 999 of the determination value of MR2. 989 to 999 are assigned to non-probability variation E. For this reason, when a special symbol hit occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol in the fifth gaming state, the game state is controlled to the fifth gaming state after the game per special symbol at a rate of about 98%. Yes.

  Here, the transition state of a game state is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition state of the gaming state. In the present embodiment, first to fifth gaming states are set as gaming states in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The first gaming state is a gaming state controlled to a low probability low base state, the second gaming state is a gaming state controlled to a high probability low base state, and the third and fourth gaming states are low probability. The gaming state is controlled to the high base state, and the fifth gaming state is a gaming state controlled to the high probability high base state. In addition, the third gaming state is a gaming state in which the high base control is terminated when one special figure game is executed or a gaming state per special figure is reached, whereas the fourth gaming state is The game state is such that the high base control is terminated by executing 100 special figure games or entering the game state per special figure before the 100 special figure games are executed.

  In this embodiment, regardless of whether the game is in the low probability state or the high probability state, in the first game state and the second game state in the low base state, the player who plays left-handed is the right player. In the case of the third to fifth gaming states that are in a high base state, it is more advantageous to play right-handed than to left-handed.

  In addition, as a name in the production of each gaming state, the third gaming state in which the high base control is terminated when one special figure game is executed or the gaming state per special figure is ended is referred to as a “chance zone”. The fourth game state in which the high base control is terminated by executing the game state per special figure before 100 special figure games are executed or before the 100 special figure games are executed is referred to as “invincible zone”. The fifth gaming state in which high base control is continuously executed after the end of the gaming state per special figure until hitting the special figure again is referred to as “RUSH”. Of these, the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state may be collectively referred to as an “advantageous section”. In the high base state, it is set so that the advantage for the player is high, such that the fourth gaming state> the fifth gaming state> the third gaming state.

  When winning per special figure in the first gaming state (low probability low base state), if the type per special figure is probability variation A, the game moves to the second gaming state (high probability low base state), and the type per special figure Shifts to the third gaming state (low probability high base state; once high base), and when the type per special figure is B, the fifth gaming state (high probability high base state; High base up to next special map). Therefore, when winning in the first gaming state with a probability of 14/100 per special figure, the rate becomes approximately A at a rate of approximately 98%, and the transition is made to the second gaming state, which is the low base state, and the third state, which is the high base state. Since it is difficult to shift to the gaming state or the fifth gaming state, the first gaming state is a disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

  When winning in the second gaming state (high probability low base state) per special figure, if the type per special figure is probability variation A, the second gaming state continues, and the type per special figure is non-probable variation A Shifts to the first gaming state (low probability low base state), and if the type per special figure is non-probability B, shifts to the third gaming state (low probability high base state; high base once) When the hit type is probability variation B, the game state shifts to the fifth gaming state (highly accurate high base state; until high base next special figure). Therefore, when winning in the second gaming state with a probability of 100/100 per special figure, the probability becomes A with a rate of about 98%, the second gaming state in the low base state continues, and the third base in the high base state. Since it is difficult to shift to the gaming state and the fifth gaming state, the second gaming state is a disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

  In this way, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first gaming state or the second gaming state, even if the winning is per special figure with a probability of 14/100 or 100/100, Since the ratio determined to non-probability B or probability B that shifts to the 3 gaming state or the 5th gaming state (high base state) is low, usually staying in either the 1st gaming state or the 2nd gaming state The period is long.

  In the 3rd game state (low probability high base state; high base once), when winning per special figure, if the type per special figure is probability variation C, the fifth game state (high probability high base state; high base next time If the type per special figure is non-probable change C, the game state shifts to the fourth gaming state (low probability high base state; high base 100 times). Therefore, in the 3rd gaming state, when winning per special figure with a probability of 14/100, it becomes a probable change C at a rate of about 98% and shifts to the 5th gaming state and shifts to the 4th gaming state at a rate of about 2%. To do. That is, the third gaming state is set to shift to the fifth gaming state at a higher rate than the transition to the fourth gaming state.

  However, since the third gaming state is a low probability state, if the variation display result of the first special symbol is not won per special symbol, that is, if the variation display result is out of probability with 86/100, With the end of the base control, the game state is shifted to the first gaming state. That is, in the 3rd game state, if it is not won per special figure in one fluctuation display, it will fall to the first game state, and the fluctuation display result will be shifted at a higher rate than that per special figure. Therefore, it is easy to shift to the first gaming state, and it is difficult to shift to the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state.

  In the 4th game state (low probability high base state; high base 100 times), when winning per special figure, if the type per special figure is probability variation D, the 5th game state (high probability high base state; high base next time If the type per special figure is non-probable change D, the fourth gaming state continues. Therefore, in the 4th game state, when winning per special figure with a probability of 14/100, the probability change D becomes approximately 98%, and the game shifts to the 5th game state. The gaming state continues. If the winning figure is selected for the non-probability variation D, the high base count is reset and 100 high base controls are newly set from that point.

  In addition, since the fourth gaming state is a low probability state, when the special symbol variation display is not won per special symbol, that is, when the variation display result is out of the probability of 86/100, the fourth gaming state Will continue. That is, since the variation display result is shifted at a higher rate than that per the special figure, the fourth gaming state continues at a higher rate than the transition to the fifth gaming state. In addition, if the display of 100 fluctuations is completed without winning a special figure, the game will shift to the first gaming state, but the probability is very low. Since the game state is not shifted to the second game state, the fourth game state is a more advantageous game state than the other third game state and the fifth game state.

  In the 5th game state (highly accurate high base state; until the next high base special figure), if the win per special figure is won, the 4th game state (low accurate high base state if the type per special figure is F) When the type per special figure is probability variation E, the fifth gaming state continues, and when the type per special diagram is non-probability variation E, the first gaming state (low probability low base) State). Therefore, in the 5th game state, if the winning is per special figure with a probability of 100/100, the probability change E becomes approximately 98%, and the 5th game state continues, and the non-probability change F becomes approximately 4%. The game state is shifted to or the non-probability E is changed to the first gaming state.

  Thus, in the fifth gaming state, the fifth gaming state continues at a higher rate than the transition to the first gaming state or the fourth gaming state, while the probability of transitioning to the fourth gaming state is extremely low. Since it is a gaming state that may shift to one gaming state, i.e., fall into a low base state, it is advantageous over the third gaming state, but is a disadvantageous gaming state over the fourth gaming state.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram of a normal symbol display result determination table. The low base normal symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 8 (A) and the high base normal symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B) are determined to be variable display results in a normal game using normal symbols. Before the normal symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 is controlled to be in an open state with the fluctuation display result as “per normal symbol” is determined based on the random value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result. This table is referred to for determination.

  The low base normal symbol display result determination table is a table used when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low base (non-high base state), and the high base normal symbol display result determination table is the pachinko gaming machine 1 This table is used when the gaming state at is high base (high base state).

  In the low base normal symbol display result determination table, a determination value of 0 is assigned to the win, and the remaining determination values of 1 to 250 are assigned to the outliers. On the other hand, in the high base normal symbol display result determination table, all determination values from 0 to 250 are assigned as hits, and no determination value is assigned as a deviation. Then, when the value of MR4 matches the hit determination value shown in FIG. 8A or FIG. 8B, the CPU 103 determines that the normal symbol is to be the normal symbol. Therefore, at the time of low base, it wins with a probability (ratio) of 1/250, and at the time of high base, it wins with a probability (ratio) of 250/250 (no loss). Thus, in the high base state, the probability that it is determined to control the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 to the open state based on the normal drawing display result as a normal figure in the non-high base state (low base state) (this embodiment) Compared to about 1/250), the probability that the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is controlled to be in the open state with the base map display result as the base map in the high base state is higher (in the present embodiment, about 250 / 250). That is, in the display result determination table, the probability of being determined to control the normally variable winning ball device 27 to the open state is higher in the high base state than in the non-high base state (low base state). As described above (including the probability of 1/1), the determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 to the open state.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, a game control counter setting unit, and a game control buffer setting unit. In addition, in a present Example, the 2nd special figure reservation | reservation memory | storage part and the universal figure reservation | reservation memory | storage part are not provided.

  The first special figure storage unit is still started although the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the first normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the start winning (first start winning) has occurred. The holding data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit establishes the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball in association with the hold number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening. The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random value MR2 for classification determination per special figure, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for special symbol variation pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on The reserved data is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) To hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a special figure is reached.

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so as to be updateable by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR6 are stored as random count values. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number which updates the numerical data which shows the random value independently of RAM122 which performs, the display control part 123 which performs the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the production | presentation display apparatus 5, and CPU120 for production control A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the effect control CPU 120 receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, the effect control CPU 120 being an I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating LED data, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B, and the like are connected to the LED control board 14.

  In response to a control signal from the effect control CPU 120, the LED control board 14 includes a frame LED 9 that is an effect LED, an open notification LED 36, a right-handed notification LED 37, a passing effect LED, and a ball number notification LED 39. Lighting / extinguishing control (7-segment LED includes lighting / extinguishing control of each segment) is executed. In addition, regarding the LEDs that can emit light in a plurality of colors, such as the frame LED 9 and the open notification LED 36, the lighting color is also controlled when the lighting control is performed.

  Note that, on the side of the effect control board 12, as with the main board 11, for example, random values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining various types of effects such as a notice effect are set.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations and settings, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. Yes.

  As an example, the ROM 121 uses the effect control CPU 120 to control the effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the effect display devices 5, speakers 8L and 8R, effect LEDs such as the frame LED 9 and effect models, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be stored is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, a special figure fluctuation effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. It consists of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in effect symbol variation display operation, reach effect, re-lottery effect, etc., or various effect display operations not accompanied by effect symbol variation display Has been. Among the special-fluctuation effect production control patterns, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns with different production modes in each reach production may be included for each variation pattern that executes the reach production. The notice effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed in response to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  In the effect control flag setting unit, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is provided. For example, the production control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the effect display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, in the effect control counter setting unit, data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters is stored.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning a prize for performing a reserved memory display in the first reserved memory display area 5D is set in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The reception command buffer at the time of the start winning prize has a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved memory number of the first special figure reserved memory. Each storage area stores data indicating the presence / absence of a start prize (specifically, “0” indicating no start prize and “1” indicating the presence of a start prize). In the first hold memory display area 5D, the hold memory display is performed based on the data stored in the storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total hold memory number of the first special figure hold memory. Note that the data in the reception command buffer at the time of the start winning prize is an effect control process which will be described later in response to the reception of the first start opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command or the reception of the first special symbol variation start command. In the first hold memory display update process (S712, see FIG. 33) in the process, the hold memory display in the first hold memory display area 5D is updated based on the data in the received command buffer at the start winning prize after the update. Updated.

  Specifically, when the first start opening winning designation command is received based on the start winning at the first start winning opening, a round white is displayed on the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D. While the display is newly added, when the first special symbol variation start command is received based on the newly started variation of the first special symbol, of the retained memory display in the first reserved memory display area 5D , So that the round white display at the top (holding memory that has been won at the start first) is erased, and the other round white display is shifted (moved) in a predetermined direction (for example, to the left) Update the pending storage display.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process that detects whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether the power-on signal has been turned on) (S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area.

  Next, the CPU 103 inputs detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the winning port switch 24, and the like via the switch circuit 110, and determines their state. (S21).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing predetermined main-side error processing, and executes error determination processing that can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result ( S22). Next, the CPU 103 executes display control processing for performing display control of the first special symbol display 4A (S23).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as the normal symbol determination random number MR4 used for game control (S24). The CPU 103 further performs an initial value random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (S25), and displays the counter value for updating the counter random number for generating the display random number. Random number update processing is performed (S26).

  Next, a special symbol process is performed (S27). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs normal symbol process processing (S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 20 and the normal winning a prize in a predetermined order. The CPU 103 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control board 12 (S29). Further, the CPU 103 performs an information output process for outputting data such as special chart information and start information supplied to a hall computer (not shown), for example (S30).

  Further, the CPU 103 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the winning opening switch 24 (S31). Specifically, it is mounted on a payout control board (not shown) in response to detection of winning based on any of the first starting port switch 22A, second starting port switch 22B, count switch 23, and winning port switch 24 being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls. The ball payout device is provided with a payout motor for paying out a prize ball. When the payout motor is rotationally controlled by the payout control microcomputer, the number of prize balls designated by the payout control microcomputer is paid out from the ball payout device.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 103 is responsible for the solenoid on / off in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. Is output to the output port (S32).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data in accordance with the value of the special symbol process flag ( S33). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 103, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 103 outputs a drive signal in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. Execute the fluctuation display.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S34). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag for normal symbol fluctuation is set, the CPU 103 outputs the output every 0.2 seconds. The display control data value set in the buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 103 outputs a driving signal according to the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby executing normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 20. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S35), and the process ends.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S28 shown in FIG. 3 as normal symbol process processing. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of S100 to S104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  In the normal symbol normal process of S100, it is determined whether or not to start the general symbol game by the normal symbol display 20. In the normal symbol normal processing, the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed as to whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is based on the numerical symbol based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result. Make a decision before making a decision. Furthermore, in the normal symbol normal process, a fixed normal symbol (one of the symbols different from the normal symbol) is set in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display unit 20 corresponding to the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game. Is done. In the normal symbol normal process, when the variation display result of the normal symbol is determined in advance, the value of the general symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the “normal symbol variation pattern setting process”.

  In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process of S101, numerical data indicating the random value MR6 for determining the regular symbol variation pattern is used based on the result of the prior determination as to whether or not the variation display result of the ordinary symbol is per common symbol. A process of determining the normal symbol variation pattern as one of a plurality of types is included. When the normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting process is executed and the normal symbol fluctuation display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation process.

  By the normal symbol normal process in S100 and the normal symbol variation pattern setting process in S101, a variation pattern including the variation display time of the fixed ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol, and the effect symbol, which becomes the variation display result of the ordinary symbol, is determined. In other words, the normal symbol normal process and the normal symbol variation pattern setting process use the random value MR4 for the general symbol display result determination and the random value MR6 for the normal symbol variation pattern determination to display the variation display mode of the normal symbol and the effect symbol. Includes processing to determine.

  The normal symbol change process of S102 includes a process for setting the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 and a process for measuring an elapsed time after the normal symbol starts changing. . For example, every time the normal symbol variation process of S102 is executed, the common symbol variation time timer value, which is the stored value in the normal symbol variation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit, is subtracted or added by one, The elapsed time is measured by the timer. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal symbol variation time corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern. When the elapsed time from the start of the normal symbol change reaches the normal symbol change time, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the normal symbol stop process.

  The normal symbol stop process in S103 includes a process for setting the normal symbol display unit 20 to stop the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and to stop and display (derived) the fixed normal symbol that is the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol. It is. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol per flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is ON (whether or not it is set), and the normal symbol per flag is ON (set) In the case, the value of the general process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the opening of the ordinary electric accessory. On the other hand, if the normal symbol per flag is off (not set), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the normal symbol normal process.

  The processing for releasing the ordinary electric accessory in S104 includes processing for setting the ordinary variable winning ball device 27 to be in an open state based on the fact that the fluctuation display result of the ordinary symbol is per ordinary figure. It is. Then, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has entered the normal winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 27, a determination as to whether or not the normal variable winning ball device 27 is closed, and the like. When the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 is closed, the value of the normal process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the normal symbol normal process.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S100 shown in FIG. 16 as the normal symbol normal processing. In this normal symbol normal process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the variable standby timer indicating that it is waiting until the next normal symbol variable display is started (S120). If the variable waiting timer has timed out, the process proceeds to S121. If the variable waiting timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to S129.

  In S121, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gate switch 21 is turned on, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. When the gate switch 21 is not turned on, the normal symbol normal process is terminated, and when the gate switch 21 is turned on, the process proceeds to S122a.

  In S122a, the CPU 103 extracts the random value MR4 for determining the normal map display result. Then, the transmission setting of the gate passage designation command is performed, and the process proceeds to S123 (S122b). The command set to be transmitted in S122b is transmitted on the effect control board 12 in the effect control command control process (S29). In S123, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set. If the high base flag is not set, the low base normal symbol display result determination table (see FIG. 8A) is selected and the process proceeds to S126 (S124). If the high base flag is set, The high base normal symbol display result determination table (see FIG. 8B) is selected and the process proceeds to S126 (S125).

  In S124 and S125, the CPU 103 compares the value of the random value MR4 extracted in S122a with the determination value per ordinary symbol in the normal symbol display result determination table selected in S124 or S125, and determines the extracted random number MR4. It is determined whether or not the value matches the determination value per ordinary symbol in the normal symbol display result determination table, that is, whether or not per ordinary symbol. If it is per ordinary symbol, the flag per ordinary symbol is set and the processing proceeds to S128a (S127). If it is “out of”, the processing proceeds to S128a without executing S127.

  In S128a, the CPU 103 determines the fixed normal symbol based on the normal symbol display result being the normal symbol or “out of”. In step S128b, the CPU 103 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, and ends the normal symbol normal process.

  The CPU 103 decrements the value of the variable standby timer by -1 based on the determination that the variable standby timer has not timed out in S120 (S129), and ends the normal symbol normal process.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S101 shown in FIG. 16 as the normal symbol variation pattern setting processing. In this normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the normal symbol per-flag is set (S131). If the normal symbol per flag is set, the process proceeds to S132, and if the normal symbol per flag is not set, the process proceeds to S133.

  In S132, the CPU 103 determines the normal symbol variation pattern as the hit variation pattern (FPA2-1) shown in FIG. 11, and proceeds to S137. In S133, the CPU 103 determines that the normal symbol variation pattern is the deviation variation pattern (FPA1-1) shown in FIG. 11, and proceeds to S137. Then, a value corresponding to the variation time of the determined normal symbol variation pattern is set in the normal symbol variation time timer (S137), and transmission settings for the normal symbol variation pattern designation command and the normal symbol variation display result designation command are performed (S138). . The command set to be transmitted in S138 is transmitted by the effect control board 12 in the effect control command control process. After execution of S138, the CPU 103 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal symbol variation process, and ends the normal symbol variation pattern setting process.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S102 shown in FIG. 16 as normal symbol variation processing. In this normal symbol variation process, the CPS 103 first determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time timer has timed out (S141). If the normal symbol variation time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to S143, and if the normal symbol variation time timer has not expired, the process proceeds to S142.

  In S142, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol variation time timer by 1, and ends the normal symbol variation process. In S143, the CPU 103 indicates a period in which the normal symbol derived and displayed in the normal symbol stop period timer is stopped based on the fact that the normal symbol variation time timer has timed out. The value of the normal symbol process flag to be updated is updated to a value corresponding to the normal symbol stop process, and the normal symbol variation process is terminated.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S103 shown in FIG. 16 as the normal symbol stop processing. In this normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is set. If the normal symbol per flag is set, the CPU 103 causes the normal symbol display 20 to stop display the normal symbol per unit, and proceeds to S152 (S151a). If the normal symbol per flag is not set, the CPU 103 Causes the normal symbol display device 20 to stop display of the shifted stop symbol and proceeds to S152 (S151b).

  In S152, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the normal symbol confirmation designation command. Note that the command set to be transmitted in S152 is transmitted by the effect control board 12 in the effect control command control process. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol stop period timer has expired (S153). If the normal symbol stop period timer has timed out, the process proceeds to S154. If the normal symbol stop period timer has not timed out, the value of the normal symbol stop period timer is decremented by 1, and the normal symbol stop process ends.

  In S154, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is set. If the normal symbol per flag is set, the process proceeds to S155. If the normal symbol per flag is not set, the variable standby timer waits until the next normal symbol change start (next variable standby time). Is set (S159a), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the normal symbol normal process, and the normal symbol stop process is terminated (S159b).

  In S155, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the high base state. When the high base flag is set, an opening control period for opening the normally variable winning ball device 27 based on the long opening pattern as the second ordinary electric accessory operating period in the electric accessory operating period timer ( 4200 ms) is set, and the process proceeds to S157a (S156b). On the other hand, when the high base flag is not set, that is, when the gaming state is the low base state, the ordinary variable winning ball device 27 is short-circuited as the first ordinary electric accessory operating time in the electric accessory operating period timer. A value corresponding to the opening control period (60 ms) for opening based on the opening pattern is set, and the process proceeds to S157a (S156a).

  As described above, the second ordinary electric accessory operating time (4200 ms) is longer than the first ordinary electric accessory operating time (60 ms). In other words, when the high base control is being executed, if the normal symbol variation display result is per ordinary figure, the normal winning opening release control based on the long open pattern is executed and the high base control is not executed. Sometimes, when the normal symbol variation display result is per ordinary symbol, the regular winning opening opening control based on the short opening pattern is executed. Therefore, if the game state at the time when the stop symbol per universal figure is stopped and displayed is a high base state, the game state at the time when the stop symbol per general figure is stopped and displayed is longer than when the game state is a low base state The regular prize opening for the period will be open.

  In step S157a, the CPU 103 opens the normal winning opening by driving the solenoid 81 that is used for the ordinary electric accessory, and sets the value of the winning number counter for counting the game balls won in the normal winning opening to 0. (S157b). In addition, the transmission setting of the normal electric accessory release start designation command corresponding to the normal electric accessory operating period (ordinary winning opening opening control period) is performed (S157c), and the value of the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory release value. The normal symbol stop process is terminated by updating to a value corresponding to the middle process (S158). Note that the command set to be transmitted in S157c is transmitted by the effect control board 12 in the effect control command control process.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S104 illustrated in FIG. In this process of releasing the ordinary electric accessory, first, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the electric agent operation period timer by -1 (S160), whether or not the winning opening switch 24 is turned on, that is, a game at the normal winning opening. It is determined whether or not the ball has won (S161). When the winning opening switch 24 is turned on, the transmission setting of the normal electric accessory winning designation command is performed (S163), and 1 is added to the winning number counter for counting the number of game balls won in the normal winning opening. (S164) It is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter has reached 10, that is, whether or not the condition for closing the normal winning opening has been established (S164).

  If it is determined in S161 that the winning opening switch 24 is not turned on, or if it is determined in S164 that the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 determines whether the electric accessory operating period timer has timed out. It is determined whether or not 60 ms or 4200 ms has elapsed since the normal winning opening was opened (S165). When the electric agent operating period timer has not timed out in S165, the normal electric agent releasing process is terminated.

  If the electric component operating period timer has expired in S165, or if it is determined in S164 that the value of the winning number counter has reached 10, the process proceeds to S166 because the closing condition of the normal winning opening is satisfied, and the normal electric accessory After the transmission setting of the normal electric accessory opening end designation command corresponding to the operation period (the opening period of the normal winning opening) is performed (S166), the normal winning opening is closed by driving the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory. (S167), the normal symbol flag is cleared (S168). Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the next variable waiting time (for example, 776 ms shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B) to the variable waiting timer (S169), and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the normal symbol normal symbol. The process is updated to a value corresponding to the process, and the process during the ordinary electric accessory opening process is terminated.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S27 shown in FIG. 3 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S41). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of S42 to S48 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit.

  In the start winning process of S41, it is determined whether or not there is a first start winning by the first start port switch 22A. If there is a winning, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the type determination per special figure The random number value MR2 for special purpose and the random number value MR3 for determining the special symbol variation pattern are extracted and stored at the top of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit.

  The special symbol normal process of S42 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol holding unit stores the first holding data, the data extracted based on the occurrence of the second starting winning by the second starting port switch 22B, etc. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or effect symbol is “per special symbol” is determined based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. And before the derived design variation display result is derived and displayed (predetermined). Further, in the special symbol normal process, the fixed special symbol (per special symbol) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol indicator 4B is displayed corresponding to the variation display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Any of the symbols that are not symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance.

  The special symbol variation pattern setting process of S43 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “1”. In this special symbol variation pattern setting process, numerical data indicating a random value MR3 for determining a special symbol variation pattern is obtained based on a result of a prior determination as to whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol is “per special symbol”. This includes a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol to be one of a plurality of types. When the special symbol variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal process of S42 and the special symbol variation pattern setting process of S43, a variation pattern including the variation display time of the confirmed special symbol, the special symbol, and the effect symbol, which becomes the variation display result of the special symbol, is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing are performed using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type per special symbol, and the random value MR3 for determining the special symbol variation pattern. It includes a process for determining the variable display mode of the symbol or effect symbol.

  The special symbol variation process of S44 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation processing includes processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, each time the special symbol variation process of S44 is executed, the first special variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit, is subtracted or incremented by 1 to obtain the first special variation variation value. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol on the symbol display 4A or a special game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B, the elapsed time is measured by a common timer. Is measured. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol change process of S44 is performed by changing the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process of S45 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display unit 4A or the second special symbol display unit 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol that is the variation display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is ON. If the special figure flag is ON, the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. Is updated. On the other hand, when the special figure hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-release processing per special figure in S46 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this pre-opening process per special figure, based on the fact that the special symbol change display result is “per special figure”, etc., a round is started in the gaming state per special figure, and the big prize opening is opened. It includes a process for setting to do this. As a setting for starting the execution of the round in the gaming state per special figure and opening the special winning opening based on the fact that the variation display result of the special symbol becomes “per special figure”, for example, a special figure Corresponding to the hit type, an upper limit of a period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set. For example, regardless of the type per special figure, the upper limit of the period during which the grand prize opening is opened is set to “0.016 seconds (16 ms)”, and the opening of the big prize opening which becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. By setting the number of times to “2 times”, it is sufficient to set the special figure per hit state.

  The process for releasing the special figure in S47 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This special process during the opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The special figure end processing in S48 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. This special figure end processing corresponds to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the gaming state per special figure is executed by an effect device such as the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the frame LED 9 or the like. Various settings to set the probability variation control and high base control in response to the completion of the gaming state per special figure (set of probability variation flag and set of high base flag) The processing to perform is included. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S42 of FIG. 22 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first special figure holding storage number is “0” (S241). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A. For example, in the process of S241, the first pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the first special figure hold storage number is other than “0” in S241, the special figure display result determination is performed as the hold data stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the type per special symbol, and the random value MR3 for determining the special symbol variation pattern are respectively read (S242). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of S242, the first special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value are decremented by one and updated, thereby causing the first special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number to be decremented by one. In addition, the data in the first special figure storage unit is updated. Specifically, random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the first special figure holding storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted up by one entry (S243). Thereafter, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer, is updated to “1” (S244), and then the process proceeds to S249.

  On the other hand, when the first special figure holding storage number is “0” in S241, it is determined whether or not the second start winning is generated, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B. Determination is made (S245). Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the second special figure.

  When the second start prize is generated in S245, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type per special figure, and the random value MR3 for determining the special symbol variation pattern Are extracted (S246). Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to “2” (S248), the process proceeds to S249. The extracted numerical data may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  In S249, a use table for determining the special symbol display result, which is the variation display result of the special symbol, to “per special symbol” or “off” is selected and set. Specifically, when the probability variation flag is not set, that is, when the gaming state is not the probability variation state, the low probability special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 7A is selected and the probability variation flag is set. If it is, that is, if it is in the probability variation state, the high-accuracy special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 7B is selected. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the fluctuation random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of “per special figure” or “out of”. Then, the special figure display result is determined as “per special figure” or “out of place” (S250).

  After the special figure display result is determined in S250, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “per special figure” (S251). Then, if it is determined that “per special figure”, the special figure per unit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is set to the ON state (S252). At this time, the type determination table per special figure is selected and set as a use table for determining any of the types per special figure (S253). At this time, the CPU 103 determines the type determination table A per special figure shown in FIGS. 9A to 9E depending on whether the gaming state is the first gaming state to the fifth gaming state. ~ E can be selected and set. By referring to the type determination table per special figure set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for type determination per special figure stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is stored in the type determination table per special figure. Multiple types per special figure depending on which of the non-probable change A to non-probable change F and the probability value assigned to each special figure type is Is determined (S254).

  By determining the type per special figure in the processing of S254, the gaming state after the end of the gaming state per special figure is changed to the low probability low base state (first gaming state), the high probability low base state (second gaming state). ), Low-accuracy base state (third gaming state), low-accuracy base state (fourth gaming state), or high-accuracy base state (fifth gaming state) to indicate whether to control the game state As a result, it is determined before the definite special symbol is derived. Corresponding to the type per special figure determined in this way, for example, by setting the type buffer value per special figure, which is the stored value of the type special buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (S255) The type per special figure is stored, and the process proceeds to S261. On the other hand, if it is determined in S251 that it is not “per special figure”, that is, if it is determined that it is “off”, the process proceeds to S261.

  In S261, whether or not to control to the gaming state per special figure (whether or not the flag per special figure is set), the result of pre-determining the type per special figure in the case of the gaming state per special figure Corresponding to, a confirmed special symbol is set. As an example, a special symbol indicating a symbol “-” that becomes a loss symbol is set as a confirmed special symbol in response to a pre-determined result indicating that the special symbol display result is “miss”. If it is determined in S251 that the special figure display result is “per special figure”, “0” to “9” which are symbols per special figure according to the determination result of the special figure type in S255. ”Or“ F ”is set as a fixed special symbol corresponding to the type of special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in S261, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S262), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  If it is determined that there is no second start winning in S245, it is determined whether or not a predetermined demonstration display is being executed on the effect display device 5 (S265). If the predetermined demonstration display is being executed, the special symbol normal process is terminated, and if the predetermined demonstration display is not being executed, the process proceeds to S268. In S268, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the normal symbol normal process. If the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the normal symbol normal processing, the special symbol normal processing is terminated after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (for example, transmission setting of a customer waiting demo designation command) (S269). ) If the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value corresponding to a process other than the normal symbol normal process, the special symbol normal process is terminated without executing S269.

  In other words, in this embodiment, when the first special figure reserved memory number does not exist and the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is not executed, a predetermined demonstration is performed in the effect display device 5. It is designed to display.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S43 of FIG. 22 as the special symbol variation pattern setting process. In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the high base flag is set, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the high base state (S271), and the high base flag is set. If it is, that is, if the gaming state is the high base state, it is determined whether or not a special figure per flag is set (S272).

  If the special figure per flag is not set in S272, a variation pattern table for losing according to the gaming state is selected (S273), and the numerical data shown in the random value MR3 for determining the special figure variation pattern is assigned to each variation pattern. Compared with the determined determination value, it is determined as any variation pattern (S274), and the process proceeds to S277. In S273, if the gaming state is the third gaming state, the deviation variation pattern table shown in FIG. 26 (A) is selected, and if the gaming state is the fourth gaming state, FIG. 26 (C) or FIG. The deviation variation pattern table shown in FIG. 26 (D) is selected. For the fifth gaming state, the shift variation pattern table is not prepared because it is per special figure with a probability of 250/250.

  In the variation pattern determination table for loss corresponding to the third gaming state shown in FIG. 26 (A), all the determination values of “0” to “999”, which are possible ranges of the random number MR6, are special symbols. The fluctuation time is 60000 ms (non-reach), and is assigned to the special symbol fluctuation pattern (TPA3-1). That is, when the variation display result of the special symbol is “out of” in the third gaming state, the special symbol is variably displayed over the period of 60000 ms, and is out of the range.

  In the variation pattern determination table for loss corresponding to the first variation in the fourth gaming state shown in FIG. 26C, all the determination values of “0” to “999” that are possible ranges of the random value MR6. However, the special symbol variation time of 60000 ms (non-reach) is assigned to the extraordinary special symbol variation pattern (TPA4-1). That is, when the variation display result of the special symbol is “out of” at the first variation of the fourth gaming state, the special symbol is variably displayed over a period of 60000 ms, and is out of sync.

  Also, in the variation pattern determination table for loss corresponding to the second and subsequent variations of the fourth gaming state shown in FIG. 26 (D), all of “0” to “999”, which are possible ranges of the random value MR6. Is assigned to the special symbol fluctuation pattern (TPA4-2) that is out of reach (non-reach) with a special symbol fluctuation time of 10,000 ms. In other words, when the variation display result of the special symbol is “out of” after the second variation of the fourth gaming state, the special symbol is unequivocally displayed over a period of 10000 ms.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns having different special symbol variation times from the above-described variation patterns may be set as variation patterns for deviation from the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state.

  If the special figure flag is set in S272, the special pattern variation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state is selected (S275), and the random number value MR2 for the special figure type determination stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is selected. In accordance with the type per special figure, the numerical data shown in the random value MR3 for special figure fluctuation pattern determination is compared with the judgment value assigned to each fluctuation pattern to determine any fluctuation pattern (S276). The process proceeds to S277. In S275, if the gaming state is the third gaming state, the variation pattern table for special figure shown in FIG. 26B is selected, and if the gaming state is the fourth gaming state, FIG. Alternatively, the variation pattern table for special figure shown in FIG. 26F is selected, and if the gaming state is the fifth gaming state, the variation pattern table for special figure shown in FIG. 27 is selected.

  In the variation pattern determination table for special figure corresponding to the third gaming state shown in FIG. 26 (B), when the type per special figure is probability variation C, the range of possible random numbers MR6 is “0” to “0”. 999 ”is assigned to a special symbol variation pattern (TPB3-1) per special symbol having a special symbol variation time of 60000 ms (non-reach) in the range of“ 0 ”to“ 699 ”. ”To“ 999 ”are assigned to the special symbol variation pattern (TPB3-2) per special symbol whose special symbol variation time is 60000 ms (non-reach). On the other hand, when the type per special symbol is non-probable variation C, the determination value in the range of “0” to “299” out of the range “0” to “999” that can be taken by the random value MR6 is the special symbol variation. It is assigned to a special symbol variation pattern (TPB3-1) per special symbol whose time is 60000 ms (non-reach), and a judgment value in the range of “300” to “999” has a special symbol variation time of 60000 ms (non-reach) Reach) It is assigned to a special symbol variation pattern (TPB3-2) per special symbol. In other words, when the effect corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern (TPB3-2) per special symbol is executed, the fourth game is performed rather than the effect corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern (TPB3-1) per special symbol is executed. Expectation for state (invincible zone) increases.

  In the variation pattern determination table for special figure corresponding to the first variation of the fourth gaming state shown in FIG. 26E, the random number MR6 regardless of whether the type per special figure is non-probable variation D or probability variation D. All the judgment values of “0” to “999” that can be taken are assigned to a special symbol variation pattern (TPB4-1) per special symbol whose special symbol variation time is 60000 ms (non-reach). ing. That is, when the variation display result of the special symbol is “per special diagram” at the first variation of the fourth gaming state, the special symbol is variably displayed over a period of 60000 ms to be per special symbol.

  In the special pattern variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second and subsequent variations of the fourth gaming state shown in FIG. 26 (F), regardless of whether the type per special diagram is non-probable variation D or certain variation D, All of the determination values of “0” to “999” that can be taken by the random value MR6 have a special symbol variation time of 10,000 ms (non-reach) special symbol variation pattern per special symbol (TPB4-1) Assigned to. That is, when the change display result of the special symbol is “per special figure” after the second change of the fourth gaming state, the special symbol is variably displayed over a period of 10000 ms to be per special figure.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation patterns having different special symbol variation times may be set as the variation patterns for special symbols in the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for special figure corresponding to the fifth gaming state shown in FIG. 27, when the type per special figure is non-probable variation E, the range of possible random numbers MR6 is “0” to “0”. 999 ”is assigned to a special symbol variation pattern (TPB5-1) per special symbol having a special symbol variation time of 20000 ms (non-reach) in the range of“ 0 ”to“ 49 ”. The determination values in the range from “99” to “99” are assigned to the special symbol variation pattern (TPB5-2) per special symbol whose special symbol variation time is 20000 ms (non-reach), and the range from “100” to “199”. Is assigned to a special symbol variation pattern (TPB5-3) per special symbol having a special symbol variation time of 20000 ms (non-reach), and a criterion value in the range of “200” to “399” is It is assigned to a special symbol variation pattern (TPB5-4) per special symbol for public power short circuit with a symbol variation time of 2400 ms, and a judgment value in the range of “400” to “999” is a special symbol variation time of 2800 ms. It is assigned to a special symbol variation pattern (TPB5-5) per special map for public electric long opening.

  In addition, when the type per special figure is a probability variation F, among the values “0” to “999” that can be taken by the random value MR6, the judgment value in the range “0” to “99” is the special symbol variation time. Is assigned to a special symbol variation pattern (TPB5-1) per special symbol (non-reach), and the judgment value in the range of “100” to “149” is a special symbol variation time of 20000 ms (non-reach) ) Special symbol per special symbol (TPB5-2) is assigned and the judgment value in the range of “150” to “199” is special symbol variation time of 20000 ms (non-reach) special symbol per special symbol The determination value assigned to the fluctuation pattern (TPB5-3) and in the range of “200” to “399” is a special symbol fluctuation pattern per special figure for the open-circuit short circuit with a special symbol fluctuation time of 2400 ms. A special symbol fluctuation pattern (TPB5-5) per special figure for the public electric long open, which has a special symbol fluctuation time of 2800 ms, is assigned to the screen (TPB5-4). 5).

  Further, when the type per special symbol is non-probable variation E, the judgment value in the range of “0” to “49” out of the range “0” to “999” that can be taken by the random value MR6 is the special symbol variation. It is assigned to a special symbol variation pattern (TPB5-1) per special symbol whose time is 20000 ms (non-reach), and the judgment value in the range of “50” to “149” is a special symbol variation time of 20000 ms (non-reach) Reach) Special symbol variation pattern per special symbol (TPB5-2) is assigned, and the judgment value in the range of “150” to “199” is special symbol variation time of 20000 ms (non-reach) special per special symbol A special symbol fluctuation pattern per special symbol for the opening of a short-circuit electric power transmission with a special symbol fluctuation time of 2400 ms is assigned to the symbol fluctuation pattern (TPB5-3) and the judgment value in the range of “200” to “899” is 2400 ms. A special symbol fluctuation pattern (TPB5-5) per special figure for the public electric long opening whose special symbol fluctuation time is 2800 ms is assigned to the screen (TPB5-4). 5).

  If the high base flag is not set in S271, that is, if the gaming state is the low base state (the first gaming state or the second gaming state), it is determined whether or not the special figure per flag is set ( S281). If the special figure per flag is not set in S281, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the off-set corresponding to the number of reserved memories specified from the held data stored in the first reserved storage unit A variation pattern table is selected (S283), and the process proceeds to S274. In S283, when the number of reserved memories is 1 or 2, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 25 (A) is selected, and when the number of reserved memories is 3, it is shown in FIG. 25 (B). When the deviation variation pattern determination table is selected and the number of reserved memories is 4, the variation pattern determination table for deviation shown in FIG. 25C is selected. When the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the deviation variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 25D is selected.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 25A, among the values “0” to “999” that can be taken by the random number MR6, the determination values in the range “0” to “699” are special. A symbol variation time of 12000 ms is assigned to a special symbol variation pattern (TPA1-1) that is not shortened (non-reach), and a judgment value in the range of “700” to “849” is a special symbol variation time of 20000 ms. A special symbol fluctuation pattern (TPA2-) assigned to the normal reach deviation special symbol fluctuation pattern (TPA2-1) and the judgment value in the range of “850” to “949” has a special symbol fluctuation time of 43,000 ms. 2), and the judgment value in the range of “950” to “999” is a supermarket whose special symbol variation time is 53000 ms. It is assigned to over Ji β out of the special symbol variation pattern (TPA2-3).

  In the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 25B, among the values “0” to “999” that can be taken by the random number MR6, the determination values in the range “0” to “699” are special. Normal reach in which the determination value in the range of “700” to “849” is assigned to the shortened (non-reach) special symbol variation pattern (TPA1-2) whose symbol variation time is 5750 ms, and the special symbol variation time is 20000 ms. The special symbol fluctuation pattern (TPA2-2) assigned to the special pattern fluctuation pattern (TPA2-1) of the outlier and the judgment value in the range of “850” to “949” has a special symbol fluctuation time of 43,000 ms. ) And the determination value in the range of “950” to “999” is a super reach β whose special symbol variation time is 53000 ms. It is assigned to the special pattern fluctuation pattern (TPA2-3) of outliers.

  In the variation pattern determination table for loss shown in FIG. 25C, among the values “0” to “999” that can be taken by the random number MR6, the determination values in the range “0” to “699” are special. Normal reach where the symbol variation time of 3750 ms is assigned to the shortened (non-reach) special symbol variation pattern (TPA1-2) and the judgment value in the range of “700” to “849” is the special symbol variation time of 20000 ms. The special symbol fluctuation pattern (TPA2-2) assigned to the special pattern fluctuation pattern (TPA2-1) of the outlier and the judgment value in the range of “850” to “949” has a special symbol fluctuation time of 43,000 ms. ) And the determination value in the range of “950” to “999” is a super reach β whose special symbol variation time is 53000 ms. It is assigned to the special pattern fluctuation pattern (TPA2-3) of outliers.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 25 (D), the determination values in all the ranges of “0” to “999” that can be taken by the random number MR6 have a special symbol variation time of 12000 ms. It is assigned to a special symbol variation pattern (TPA5-1) that is not a shortened (non-reach).

  If the special figure per flag is set in S281, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the fluctuation pattern table for special figure shown in FIG. 25E is selected, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is selected. When “2” is “2”, the special pattern variation pattern table shown in FIG. 25F is selected (S282), and the process proceeds to S274.

  In the special pattern variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 25 (E), among the values “0” to “999” that can be taken by the random number MR6, the determination values in the range “0” to “199” are included. The special symbol variation time (20000 ms) is assigned to the special symbol variation pattern (TPB2-1) per normal reach special symbol without shortening, and the judgment value in the range of “200” to “549” is the special symbol variation time of 43000 ms. Assigned to a special symbol variation pattern (TPB2-2) per super-reach α special symbol, and a judgment value in the range of “100” to “199” is per super-reach β special symbol whose special symbol variation time is 53000 ms. It is assigned to the special symbol variation pattern (TPB2-3).

  In the special pattern variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 25 (F), the determination values in all the ranges of “0” to “999” that can be taken by the random value MR6 are the special symbol variation times. It is assigned to a special symbol fluctuation pattern (TPB1-1) per non-shortening (non-reach) special figure of 12000 ms.

  In S277, the CPU 103 uses the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A and the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B in accordance with the variable special designation buffer value. The setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special figure games. As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of S277, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the change of the special symbol are performed (S278). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a game state designation command, a first variation start command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the symbol variation display result notification command and the first reserved memory number notification command, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is used for game control. The data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the buffer setting unit. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command, a special symbol to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the symbol variation display result notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store. Note that the command set to be transmitted in S285 is transmitted by the effect control board 12 in the effect control command control process.

  After the processing of S278 is executed, a value corresponding to the special symbol variation time, which is the special symbol variation display time corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol variation pattern, is set in the special symbol variation time timer (S279). The special figure fluctuation time, which is the special symbol fluctuation display time, is the time required from the start of special symbol fluctuation in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that is the fluctuation display result (special figure display result) is derived and displayed. It is. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S280), and then the special symbol variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S45 illustrated in FIG. 22 as the special symbol stop process. In this special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process of S44 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B Control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (S291). If the variation special symbol designation buffer value is “1” indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is In the case of “2” indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol indicator 4B is terminated. Moreover, control which transmits a symbol determination command to the production control board 12 is performed (S292). Note that the command set to be transmitted in S292 is transmitted by the effect control board 12 in the effect control command control process. Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop period timer has expired (S293). The special symbol stop period timer is a timer indicating a waiting time until the next special symbol variation display is started, and is set when it is determined that the special symbol variation time has elapsed in the special symbol variation processing. Is done. If the special symbol suspension period timer has timed out, the process proceeds to S295. If the special symbol suspension period timer has not expired, the special symbol suspension period timer is decremented by 1, and the special symbol suspension process is terminated. (S294).

  In S295, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure flag is set (S295). If the special figure flag is not set, the process proceeds to S305a. On the other hand, if the special figure hit flag is set, the process proceeds to S296.

  In S296, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set, the CPU 103 clears the set flag and the high base number counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the type per special figure (S297a), and transmits a game state designation command indicating the normal state (low base state) to the effect control board 12. Settings are made (S297b). Note that the command set to be transmitted in S297a and S297b is transmitted on the effect control board 12 in the effect control command control process.

  Then, a value corresponding to the display time per special figure (for example, the time for which the effect display device 5 notifies that the special figure has occurred) is set in the display time timer per special figure (S298). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (S299). Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, that is, whether or not the special figure fluctuation is a fluctuation display based on the second special symbol (S300). Is "2", the fluctuation pattern information of the second special figure, that is, the fluctuation pattern type is updated and stored (S301), and the process proceeds to S302. If the variation special figure designation buffer value is not “2” in S300, that is, if the special figure variation is a variation display based on the first special symbol, the process proceeds to S302 as it is. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-release processing per special symbol (S36) (S302), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in S305a, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set. If the high base flag is set, the process proceeds to S305b. If the high base flag is not set, the process proceeds to S309.

  In S <b> 305 b, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the high base state is “1”. When the value of the high base number counter is “1”, the high base number counter and the high base flag are cleared to end the high base control (S306), and the gaming state corresponding to the low base state The setting for transmitting the specified command is performed, and the process proceeds to S308 (S307). Note that the command set to be transmitted in S307 is transmitted on the effect control board 12 in the effect control command control process.

  If the value of the high base number counter is not “1” in S305b, the process proceeds to S308 without executing S306 and S307. In S308, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is terminated. Note that the case where the value of the high base number counter is not “1” in S305b includes the case where the value is “0”. In other words, if the type of special figure is one of probability variations B to E in which the high base state continues until the next special figure in the special figure termination process described later, it is high unless the fluctuation display result is per special figure. In order not to clear the base flag, “0” is set as the value of the high base number counter, and it is determined in S305b that the value of the high base number counter is not “1”.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S48 of FIG. In the special figure end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (S311). If the end display timer per special figure is not in operation, the display time corresponding to the variation pattern per special figure and the type per special figure is specified (S312), and the value corresponding to the display time is set to the end display timer per special figure. To end the special figure end processing (S313).

  In other words, the display time corresponding to the game state to be shifted after the end of the game state per special figure specified from the variation pattern type before the special figure and the type per special figure is changed to a plurality of types of display times. One of them is determined and set to the end display timer per special figure. In this embodiment, the opening control period of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is constant (0.732 seconds) in any gaming state of any special figure type, but this special display end display timer is different. By setting the time, it is possible to change (adjust) the period from the start to the end of the gaming state per special figure.

  On the other hand, when the end display timer per special figure is operating, the value of the end display timer per special figure is decremented by 1 (S314). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special figure end display timer has expired, that is, whether or not the special figure end display time has elapsed (S315). If the special figure end display timer is not up, the special figure end process is terminated. If the special figure end display timer is up, the CPU 103 clears the special figure flag (S316), and controls the special figure end designation command corresponding to the special figure type of the game per special figure. Setting for transmitting to the substrate 12 is performed, and the process proceeds to S318 (S317). Note that the command set to be transmitted in S317 is transmitted by the effect control board 12 in the effect control command control process.

  In S318, the CPU 103 executes processing for setting a flag and a counter corresponding to the type of special figure. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, when it is determined that the type per special figure is non-probability change A, non-probability change E, or probability change A, the game state is controlled to the low base state. The flag, high base flag, and high base number counter are not set.

  On the other hand, if the type per special figure is any of A, B, C, D, E per probability variation special figure, the game state shifts to the second game state or the fifth game state after the game state per the special figure ends. Then, the probability variation flag is set, and a value of “0” is set in the high base number counter, and the process proceeds to S326. In S320, if the type per special figure is one of B, C, D, or E per probability variation special figure, the value of “0” is set in the high base count counter until the next special figure. The high base flag is not cleared in S306 of the special symbol stop process.

  Further, when the type per special figure is non-probability B, that is, when shifting to the third gaming state after the gaming state per special figure, a value of “1” is set to the high base number counter (S325). The process proceeds to S326. On the other hand, if the type per special figure is any of C, D, and F, the value of “100” is set in the high base number counter, and the process proceeds to S326.

  Then, after setting the transmission of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on whether or not the high base flag and the probability variation flag are set (S326), The value is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and the special symbol termination process is terminated (S327). Note that the command set to be transmitted in S326 is transmitted by the effect control board 12 in the effect control command control process.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S22 of FIG. 15 as the error determination process. In this error determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the gate switch 21 is in an on state, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 (S401). When it is determined that the gate switch 21 is not in the on state, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is in the on state, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start winning port (S402). If it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not in the ON state, it is determined that the game ball has not entered the passing gate 41 and the second starting winning port, and the process proceeds to S403, and other error determination processing other than the gate passing error is performed. This is executed (S403), and the error determination process is terminated.

  As another error determination process, for example, the CPU 103 controls the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the second state where the special winning opening is closed, that is, when a game ball is won, that is, When a game ball is won when the value of the special symbol process flag is not a value corresponding to the processing during opening per special symbol, or when the normal variable winning ball device 27 is in the second normal state in which the normal winning opening is closed. If there is a game ball win when controlling, that is, if the game ball wins when the value of the normal symbol process flag is not a value corresponding to the processing during the normal electric accessory release, It is possible to determine that it has occurred. Further, other abnormalities (errors) other than the abnormal winning determination are also determined.

  When the gate switch 21 is on in S401, the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, and 1 is added to the gate switch counter (S410). Whether or not the value of the gate switch counter becomes “5” in S411 Is determined (S411). If the value of the gate switch counter is not “5” in S411, the process proceeds to S403. If the value of the gate switch counter becomes “5” in S411, that is, if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but does not win the second start five times, it is determined that a gate passing error has occurred. After the error setting command transmission setting is performed (S412), the security signal output setting is performed (S413), the value of the gate switch counter is reset to “0” (S414), and the process proceeds to S403. If the second start port switch 22B is on in S402, the value of the gate switch counter is reset to “0” (S420), and the process proceeds to S403.

  In the present embodiment, the game balls are fired toward the game area at intervals of about 0.6 seconds, and as described above, most of the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 are the second normal prize after about 0.2 seconds. A game ball path is formed so as to enter the second start winning opening of the ball device 6B. Therefore, when the CPU 103 determines that the gate switch 21 is in the on state in S401 of the error determination process in the timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 next determines that the gate switch 21 is in the on state in S401 of the error determination process. In S402 of the error determination process, it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state.

  That is, 1 is added to the gate switch counter in S410 based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, but the game ball is added to S410 based on the fact that the subsequent game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. Before the gate switch counter is newly incremented by 1, the gate switch counter value is reset to “0” in S420 based on the entry to the second start winning opening. If it is, only “1” or “0” is repeated. In addition, when the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 flows down the game area without entering the second start winning opening, the value of the gate switch counter may become “1” or more. It hardly occurs more than 3 times continuously.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the value of the gate switch counter becomes “5”, it is determined that an error has occurred in S411. For example, the threaded ball passed through the passage gate 41 using a thread hanging ball or the like. The act of returning the game ball and allowing it to pass again is repeatedly performed, so that it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as illegally obtaining a prize ball by generating a normal figure and opening the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27.

  It should be noted that a situation in which one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but does not enter the second start winning opening of the second normal winning ball apparatus 6B is generated with two to three consecutive times although the probability is very low. Or by erroneous detection due to noise or the like. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid an error designation command and a security signal being transmitted even if no error has occurred, the gate switch counter value is set with a margin. If “5” is reached, it is determined in S411 that an error has occurred. In this embodiment, when the value of the gate switch counter reaches “5”, it is determined that an error has occurred in S411. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the passing gate is not limited to this. A value other than “5” may be set according to the positional relationship between 41 and the second start winning opening of the second normal winning ball apparatus 6B.

  FIG. 31 illustrates the control contents of various devices associated with the above-described normal symbol variation display and second special symbol variation display.

  When the gaming state is controlled to any of the third gaming state, the fourth gaming state, and the fifth gaming state, the high base state in which the high base control is executed is set. In the high base state, when the normal symbol variation display is executed, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is 250/250. Therefore, by passing the game ball through the passing gate 41, the normal winning opening of the normal variable winning ball device 27 is set. Since the frequency of the open state increases, the player is more advantageous than the left-handed game by performing the right-handed game.

  Further, in the high base state, when the stop symbol per normal figure is stopped and displayed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, if the game state at that time is the high base state, the long open pattern is set. Based on this, the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is executed, so that it is easy to obtain the outgoing ball.

  On the other hand, even in the high base state, the period during which the special symbol variation display result is per special figure is controlled in the gaming state per special figure, so the base state is low. When the stop symbol is displayed in a stopped state, if the gaming state at that time is a gaming state per special figure, that is, a low base state, the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is executed based on the short opening pattern. For this reason, it is difficult to acquire the ball.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when a right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 wins the second start winning opening of the second normal winning ball device 6B, and the normal symbol and Fluctuation display with the second special symbol is started almost simultaneously. Then, the result per ordinary figure is derived and displayed with a probability of 250/250, and the release control of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 is executed. The variation display result of the second special symbol is the display result per special figure. If this happens, the gaming state temporarily becomes a low base state. Therefore, when the stop symbol per normal symbol is stopped and displayed, if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable state, the high base state is set. Therefore, the release control of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long release pattern is performed. On the other hand, when the game state at the time when the stop symbol per normal figure is stopped and displayed is the game state per special figure, the low base state is set. Release control is executed.

  Further, when the variation display result of the second special symbol is out of place, the game state is not controlled per special symbol, that is, the low base state is not obtained. Therefore, regardless of which variation display time is selected as the variation pattern for the special symbol, the point at which the stationary symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed is in the high base state, so the normal variable prize based on the long open pattern The opening control of the ball device 27 is executed.

  In this embodiment, when the display of fluctuations between the normal symbol and the second special symbol is started almost simultaneously in the high base state, the fluctuation pattern (FPA2) always has a fluctuation display time of 2.7 seconds. -1) is determined, on the other hand, as the second special symbol variation pattern, the variation display time is shorter than the variation display time of the normal symbol variation pattern (for example, the variation display time of TPB5-4, etc. The fluctuation pattern for 4 seconds of normal electric short circuit opening) and the long fluctuation pattern (for example, TPA3-1, 4-1, TPB3-1, 4-1-2, 5-1-3, 5-5, etc.) is determined, the period during which the opening control of the normally variable winning ball device 27 is executed, that is, Opening period of passing the winning port is made to be different.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a short-term open round for the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in any gaming state of any special figure type. Since it is only opened for 0.016 seconds, it is difficult to acquire a ball for each special figure. On the other hand, in the high base state, the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is executed based on the long opening pattern. Since the frequency at which it is easy to acquire the ball is increased, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the regular symbol in the normal symbol variation display in the high base state than in the special symbol variation display.

  In the low base state (the first and second game states in this embodiment), the effect control CPU 120 uses the first special drawing or the second special symbol in each effect symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of the effect display device 5. While the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol is executed, in the fifth game state in the high base state, the first symbol corresponding to the normal symbol and the special symbol is displayed in each effect symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. In the third gaming state, the reduced display of the second effect symbol is executed according to the normal symbol and the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the change display of the second effect symbol is not executed in the fourth gaming state.

  FIG. 31 (A) shows a variation pattern with a variation display time of 2.7 seconds as a variation pattern per ordinary diagram when variation display of the normal symbol and the second special symbol is started almost simultaneously in the high base state. FPA 2-1) is determined, and the variation display result of the second special symbol is a variation pattern in which the variation display time per special diagram is a short variation pattern with a variation display time of 2.4 seconds (for example, TPB5-4 It is an example of the operation | movement aspect of each apparatus when a variation pattern) is determined.

  First, in response to the start of the variable display between the normal symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display of the second effect symbol is started. Actually, the normal symbol variation display is started as the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, and the second special symbol variation display is started about 0.2 seconds after the start of the variation display. In response to the start of the special symbol variation display, the second production symbol variation display is started. However, since the time difference is less than about 1 second, the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in appearance. Thus, since it seems that the change display of the second effect symbol has started, this is also shown in FIG.

  When the second special symbol is a short variation pattern, the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped before the variation display of the normal symbol is stopped, and the game state per special symbol is stopped. The game state at the time of the game becomes a low base state. Therefore, the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the short opening pattern is executed based on the stop symbol per normal display being stopped. In addition, the opening control period of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 is set to 836 ms. However, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, in addition to the opening control period of 732 ms, the end display period (ending effect per 404 ms) is displayed. (Period) is set, the release control of the normal variable winning ball device 27 and the special variable winning ball device 7 is almost completed.

  Further, the stop symbol of the second effect symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the stop symbol per special symbol being stopped and displayed. Here, although the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is per ordinary figure, when the short fluctuation pattern is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, the opening control of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the short opening pattern is executed. As a result, since it is substantially difficult to acquire the ball, the off symbol (uneven symbol) is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second effect symbol. By doing in this way, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of incongruity because the winning symbol is not opened long even though the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol.

  FIG. 31 (B) shows a variation pattern with a variation display time of 2.7 seconds as a variation pattern per ordinary diagram when variation display of the normal symbol and the second special symbol is started almost simultaneously in the high base state. FPA 2-1) is determined, and the variation display time of the variation display time is 2.8 seconds as the variation pattern in which the variation display result of the second special symbol is per special diagram (for example, the variation display time of TPB5-5 is 2. It is an example of the operation | movement aspect of each apparatus in the case where the 8 second public power long open pattern) is determined.

  When the second special symbol is a long variation pattern, the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped after the variation display of the normal symbol is stopped, and the gaming state per special symbol is reached. The gaming state becomes a high base state. Therefore, the release control of the normally variable winning ball device 27 based on the long release pattern is executed based on the stop symbol per normal display being stopped. In addition, the opening control period of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 is set to 4976 ms. However, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, in addition to the opening control period of 732 ms, the end display period per special figure (ending effect) is set to 4144 ms. (Period) is set, the release control of the normal variable winning ball device 27 and the special variable winning ball device 7 is almost completed.

  Also, after the stop symbol of the second effect symbol is temporarily stopped in response to the stop symbol of the normal symbol being stopped, the second effect symbol is in response to the stop symbol of the special symbol being stopped and displayed. The stop symbol of is stopped and displayed. Here, the variation display result of the normal symbol is per common symbol, but when the long variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the release control of the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long release pattern is executed. In addition, since it is possible to substantially expect the appearance of the ball, the winning symbol (matched symbol) is stopped and displayed as the temporary stop symbol and stop symbol of the second effect symbol. Thus, by stopping and displaying the winning symbol in the second effect symbol, it is possible to notify the player that the normal winning opening is long open.

  Here, the case where the normal symbol and the second special symbol are started to be displayed almost simultaneously has been described here. For example, in the high base state, the normal symbol changes as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variation patterns of other variation display times longer than the display time of 2.7 seconds (for example, TPA3-1, 4-1, TPB3-1-2, 41-2, 5-1-3, 5- 5) is determined, the game state at the time when the variation display of the normal symbol is stopped becomes the high base state, so that the release control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long release pattern is executed. become. Also, in the case of a special symbol variation pattern with a variation display time of 60 seconds, release control based on the regular symbol variation display and the long variable release pattern of the ordinary variable winning ball device 27 is executed a plurality of times during the special symbol variation display period. It becomes possible.

  In other words, if you continue to make a right turn during the long-term fluctuation display of the special symbol, even if the game ball enters the second start winning opening, the special symbol is in the variable display, so a new special symbol is displayed. However, if the normal symbol is not a variable display, a new normal symbol is generated based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41. If the variation display of the special symbol is started and the variation display of the special symbol is continued for a long time, the release control of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long release pattern is executed. .

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S703). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S704), and executes the following process.

  The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (S705). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 3) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a first effect symbol effect control process (S706). In the first effect design effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (special effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

  In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control performs the second effect symbol effect control process (S707). In the second effect design effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (normal effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

  Next, a special symbol non-fluctuation effect execution process (S708) that can execute a customer waiting demonstration effect and a first special symbol change start waiting effect when the special symbol change display is not executed, and an effect according to the gaming state A background image display process (S709) for switching a background image displayed on the display device 5 and an error notification process (S710) for notifying that an error has been detected are executed, and the process proceeds to S702.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first effect design effect control process (S706) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first updates the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D of the effect display device 5 to a display corresponding to the storage content of the effect control buffer setting unit. A memory display update process is executed (S712).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of S713 to S719 according to the value of the first effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S713): It is confirmed whether or not a special symbol variation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a special symbol variation pattern designation command is received in the command analysis processing. If the special symbol variation pattern designation command has been received, the value of the first effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the first effect symbol variation start process (S714).

  First effect symbol variation start process (S714): Control is performed so that the variation of the first effect symbol (alphanumeric effect symbol) is started in conjunction with the special symbol variation display. Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first effect symbol changing process (S715).

  First effect symbol variation processing (S715): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the special symbol variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first effect symbol variation stop process (S716).

  First effect symbol variation stop process (S716): Based on the reception of the effect control command (special symbol confirmation designation command) instructing all symbols to stop, the first effect symbol variation is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) Control to derive and display. Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol display process (S717) or the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S713).

  Special symbol display processing (S717): After the end of the special symbol variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 5 of the occurrence of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, only when a special figure per type (for example, non-probability variation B and probability variation B) that accompanies the transition from the low base state to the high base state occurs, the per-specific figure display. When the process is executed and a special figure of a type not accompanied by the transition to the high base state (for example, non-probability change A and probability change A) occurs, the process is not executed. Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special game processing (S718).

  In the present embodiment, display processing for each special figure is performed for each special figure (for example, non-probability variation B and certain variation B) with a transition from the low base state to the high base state. Although the form to perform was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, You may make it perform the display process per said special figure for all the types per special figure.

  Processing during game per special figure (S718): Control during game per special figure is performed. For example, when receiving a special command during opening of the special prize opening or a designation command after opening the special prize opening, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special effect end effect process (S719).

  Special figure end effect processing (S719): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the gaming state per special figure has ended. Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S713).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process in the first effect symbol effect control process. In the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the high base flag is set, that is, whether or not the high base state is set (S910). When the high base flag is set, that is, in the high base state, the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process is terminated. When the high base flag is not set, that is, when the low base state is set, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception flag is set (S911). If the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception flag is not set, the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process is terminated, and if the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception flag is set, the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception flag is set. The reception flag is cleared and the process proceeds to S919 (S913).

  Then, in S919, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the first effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the first effect symbol variation start process, and ends the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process. Thus, the variable display of the first effect symbol is executed only in the low base state.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a first effect symbol variation start process in the first effect symbol effect control process. In the first effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the first special symbol variation start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the first special symbol variation start command is received. Determination is made (S921). If the first special symbol variation start command reception flag is set, the process proceeds to S922a. If the second special symbol variation start command reception flag is set, the process proceeds to S923a.

  In S922a, the effect control CPU 120 clears the first special symbol variation start command reception flag. Then, the first special figure reservation storage number in the start winning reception command buffer is shifted to proceed to S924. In S923a, the effect control CPU 120 clears the second special symbol variation start command reception flag and proceeds to S924 (S923a).

  In S924, the effect control CPU 120 reads a special symbol variation pattern designation command from the special symbol variation pattern designation command storage area. Then, the stop symbol of the first effect symbol is determined according to the data stored in the special symbol display result designation command storage area (S925).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a symbol variation control pattern (process table) corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern (S926). Then, the first effect symbol process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S927).

  Next, the production control CPU 120 performs the production device (the production display device 5 as the production component, the production use) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.). Control of the frame LED 9 and the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. as parts is executed (S928). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123 made of VDP or the like. In addition, a control signal is output to the LED control board 14 and the like in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of the frame LED 9. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the special symbol variation pattern designation command is set in the first effect symbol variation time timer (S929), and a value corresponding to the predetermined time is set in the first effect symbol variation control timer. Set (S930). Further, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first effect symbol variation processing (S715), and the first effect symbol variation start process is ended (S931).

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the first effect symbol changing process (S715) in the first effect symbol effect control process. In the first effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the values of the first effect symbol process timer, the first effect symbol variation time timer, and the first effect symbol variation control timer by 1 (S941, S942, and S941, S942, respectively). S943).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first effect symbol process timer has timed out (S944). If the first effect symbol process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (S945). That is, the first effect symbol process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the first effect symbol process timer (S946). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the process data (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) set next, and the process proceeds to S949 (S947). ). If the first effect symbol process timer has not timed out in S944, the effect device (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) corresponding to the first effect symbol process timer is displayed ( The effect display device 5 as the effect part, the frame LED 9 as the effect part, the speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) are controlled (S948), and the process proceeds to S960.

  In S949, it is determined whether or not the first effect symbol variation control timer has timed out (S949). When the first effect symbol variation control timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the first effect symbol in the middle left and right (after 30 ms has elapsed since the previous display switching time of the first effect symbol). Image data of a screen to be displayed is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (S950). As such, in the effect display device 5, the variation control of the first effect symbol is realized. The display control unit 123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the effect display device 5. Output. As such, the effect display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the effect symbol in the variation of the first effect symbol. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the first effect symbol variation control timer, and the process proceeds to S960 (S951). If the first effect symbol process timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to S960 without executing S950 to S951.

  In S960, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first effect symbol variation time timer has expired (S960). If the first effect symbol variation time timer has timed out, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first effect symbol variation stop process (S716) (S962), and the first effect symbol variation is changed. End the middle process. Even if the first effect symbol variation time timer has not timed out in S960, it is determined whether or not a special symbol confirmation designation command reception flag indicating that a special symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S961), If the special symbol confirmation designation command reception flag is set, in S962, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first effect symbol variation stop process (S716) (S962), and the first effect symbol is set. The process during change is terminated. Even if the first effect symbol variation time timer has not timed out, when the special symbol confirmation designation command is received, the control shifts to stop the variation. For example, a long variation time is caused due to noise between substrates. Even when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is received, the variation of the first effect symbol can be terminated when the regular special symbol variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol variation ends).

  In the process table used for the variation control of the first effect symbol, process data during the variation display of the first effect symbol is set. That is, the sum of the first effect symbol process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variation time of the first effect symbol. Therefore, when the first effect symbol process timer of the last process data n is timed out in the process of S949, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, LED control execution data, etc.), and the first effect based on the process table. The design control of the symbol ends.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a first effect symbol stop process (S716) in the first effect symbol effect control process. In the first effect symbol stop process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first effect symbol stop period timer is operating (S1031). When the first effect symbol stop period timer is not in operation, the effect control CPU 120 derives and displays a predetermined stop symbol of the first effect symbol (S1032), and the first effect symbol stop period timer displays the first effect. A value corresponding to the symbol stop period is set, and the first effect symbol variation stop process is ended (S1033). Further, when the first effect symbol stop period timer is operating, the value of the first effect symbol stop period timer is decremented by 1 (S1034), and it is determined whether or not the first effect symbol stop period timer is up. (S1035). When the first effect symbol stop period timer is not up, the first effect symbol change stop process is terminated. When the first effect symbol stop period timer is up, the received special symbol change display result is designated. It is determined with reference to the command whether or not the fluctuation display result is per special figure (S1036).

  When the special symbol variation display result is per special symbol, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol display process, and the first effect symbol variation stop process is terminated (S1042). . Further, when the variation display result is not per special figure, that is, when it is out of place, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the first effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process ( S1039).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special effect end effect process (S719) in the first effect symbol effect control process. In the special effect end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the value of the effect period measurement timer by 1 (S1051), and determines whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (S1052). The effect period measurement timer is a timer for measuring the effect period of the end effect per special figure, and is set at the end of the final round of the game per special figure in the process of releasing the ordinary electric accessory. If the performance period measurement timer has timed out, the process proceeds to S1065, and if the effect period measurement timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to S1054.

  In S1054, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special effect end effect process timer for executing the special effect end effect is operating. If the special effect end effect process timer is operating, the process proceeds to S1060. If the special effect end effect process timer is not active, the process proceeds to S1056.

  In step S1056, the effect control CPU 120 selects a special effect end effect process table. Then, the process timer for ending effect per special figure in the process data 1 of the process table for ending effect per selected special figure is started (S1057).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect device (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.) according to the contents of the first process data (process data 1) of the end effect per special figure. The effect display device 5 as an effect part, the frame LED 9 as an effect part and the speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) are controlled to end the special effect end effect process (S1058).

  If the special effect end effect process timer for executing the special effect per drawing is not in operation in S1054, whether the special effect end effect process timer for executing the special effect has expired. (S1060), if the process timer for the end effect per special figure has not timed out, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data for the end effect per special figure (S1061). The end effect process ends.

  When the process timer for special effects per end for executing special effects per end in S1054 times out, the process data is switched (S1062). That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set as the process timer for the end effect per first special figure, so that the process timer for the end effect per first special figure is started again (S1063). Also, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the process data (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) set next, and the end effect per special drawing. The process proceeds (S1064).

  When the production period measurement timer expires in S1052, the predetermined flag is cleared (S1065), and the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S1069). ), The special drawing end effect process ends.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second effect design effect control process (S707) in the effect control main process. In the second effect design effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 performs an opening notification effect control process (S780), a winning display process (S793) for displaying that the game ball has been won in the normal variable winning ball device 27, and a second effect. The processes of S800 to S806 are performed according to the value of the control process flag.

  In the second effect symbol effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes an opening notification effect control process for notifying that the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is executing an opening control based on the long opening pattern ( S780).

  As shown in FIG. 40 (A), in the release notification effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reception flag of the normal electric accessory release start designation command of the long release pattern is set, that is, the long release. It is determined whether or not the opening control of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the pattern is started (S781). When the reception flag of the normal electric accessory opening start designation command of the long opening pattern is set, it is determined whether or not the opening notification LED lighting prohibition flag indicating that the lighting of the opening notification LED is prohibited is set. When the determination is made (S782) and the open notification LED lighting prohibition flag is not set, the open notification LED 36 is turned on (S783), and the process proceeds to S784.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the fourth gaming state (S784). If the gaming state is the fourth gaming state, a long indicating the number of executions of the opening control of the normal variable winning ball device 27 based on the long opening pattern. 1 is added to the value of the number-of-releases counter (S785), and the release of the normal variable winning ball device 27 based on the long release pattern is started on the effect display device 5 and the game is long opened after being controlled to the fourth gaming state. An image (for example, see FIG. 48C and FIG. 48E) indicating the number of times the opening control of the normal variable winning ball device 27 based on the pattern is executed is displayed (S786). Whether or not the game state is the fourth game state may be determined by whether or not there is a fourth game state designation command reception flag. In addition, the value of the long release number counter may be cleared together with the fourth gaming state designation command reception flag.

  If the reception flag of the normal electric accessory opening start designation command of the long opening pattern is not set in S781, the opening notification LED lighting prohibition flag is set in S782, and if it is not the fourth gaming state in S784, S787 Proceed to

  In S787, it is determined whether or not the reception flag of the normal electric accessory opening end designation command of the long opening pattern is set (S787). If the reception flag of the normal electric accessory opening end designation command of the long opening pattern is set, it is determined whether or not the opening notification LED 36 is lit (S788), and the opening notification LED 36 is lit. If there is, the lighting of the opening notification LED 36 is terminated (S789), and if an image indicating the number of times the opening control of the normal variable winning ball device 27 based on the long opening pattern is displayed is displayed. Is terminated (S790), and the opening notification effect control process is terminated. When the reception flag of the normal electric accessory opening end designation command of the long opening pattern is set in S784 and when the opening notification LED 36 is not lit in S785, the opening notification effect control process is ended.

  FIG. 40 (B) shows an example of the details of the opening notification effect control process. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 lights the release notification LED 36 during the period in which the release control of the normal variable winning ball device 27 based on the long release pattern is executed, so that the normal winning opening is kept open for a long period of time. Notify that it is. Note that the open notification LED 36 is not lit in the low base state or during the period when the opening control of the normally variable winning ball device 27 based on the short opening pattern is being executed, so that the normal variable winning ball device 27 is in the high base state. The player is informed only when the player is in an open state in which it is possible to acquire a ball.

  Further, the opening notification LED 36 is turned on by controlling the opening of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long opening pattern based on the fact that the changing display of the normal symbol is stopped before the changing display of the special symbol is finished in the high base state. Is executed, but the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 is released based on the long release pattern from the end of the special symbol variation display to the start of the next special symbol variation display. It is not executed when control is executed. In other words, such a situation became a normal figure after the game ball passed through the passing gate and the normal symbol fluctuation display was started in a state where the special symbol fluctuation display was not executed in the high base state. In this case, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long open pattern is executed, but the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 does not win the second start.

  Such a situation does not occur as described above, but it is illegal many times by backflowing a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 due to an irregular state or an illegal act using a hanging ball. There is a possibility of passing. Therefore, in the period from the end of the special symbol variation display to the start of the next special symbol variation display in the high base state, that is, the period during which the open notification LED lighting prohibition flag is set, When the ball device 27 is opened based on the long opening pattern, lighting of the opening notification LED 36 is not started.

  Returning to FIG. 39, after the release notification effect control process in S780 is completed, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric winning item winning designation command reception flag is set, that is, during the release period of the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 27. Is determined (S790), and if the ordinary electric accessory winning designation command reception flag is not set, the process proceeds to S792, and if the ordinary electric accessory winning designation command reception flag is set, The ordinary electric accessory winning designation command reception flag is cleared (S791), and the process proceeds to S792.

  In S792, it is determined whether or not the release notification LED 36 is lit (S792). If the release notification LED 36 is lit, a winning display process is executed (S793), and a second effect control process flag is set. The processing of S800 to S806 is performed according to the value of. Further, when the opening notification LED 36 is not lit, the processes of S800 to S806 are performed according to the value of the second effect control process flag without executing the winning display process.

  In the winning display process in S793, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (K), every time a game ball wins, a number such as “+40” indicating the number of winning balls is updated or displayed, or a sound effect is accompanied with the winning. And so on.

  Special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not a special symbol variation pattern designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a special symbol variation pattern designation command is received in the command analysis processing. The effect display device 5 receives a special symbol variation pattern designation command and determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the read special symbol variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern for releasing an ordinary electric accessory. If the display setting in is performed, the value of the second effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the second effect symbol variation start process (S801).

  Second effect symbol variation start process (S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the second effect symbol (Chinese numeral effect symbol) is started in conjunction with the normal symbol variation display. Then, the value of the second effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second effect symbol changing process (S802).

  Second effect symbol variation processing (S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the normal symbol variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the second effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second effect symbol variation stop process (S803).

  Second effect symbol variation stop process (S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (ordinary symbol confirmation designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the second effect symbol variation is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) Control to derive and display. Then, the value of the second effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol display process (S804) or the normal symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S800).

  Special symbol display process (S804): After the special symbol change time is over, the effect display device 5 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, only when a special figure per type (for example, non-probability variation C, E, F and probability variation C, D) is generated among the special drawings, the display per special figure is displayed. When the process is executed and a special figure of a type that does not accompany the game state transition (for example, non-probability change D and probability change E) occurs, the process is not executed. Then, the value of the second effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special game processing (S805).

  In the present embodiment, display processing per special figure is performed for each special figure (for example, non-probability variation C, E, F and probability variation C, D) with a transition of the gaming state. Although the form to perform was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, You may make it perform the display process per said special figure for all the types per special figure.

  Processing during game per special figure (S805): Control during game per special figure. For example, when receiving a special command during opening of the special prize opening or a designation command after opening the special prize opening, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the second effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special effect end effect process (S806).

  Special figure end effect processing (S806): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the game state per special figure has ended. Then, the value of the second effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S800).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process in the second effect design effect control process. In the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the high base flag is set, that is, whether or not the high base state is set (S810). When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the low base state, the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process is terminated. If it is in the high base state, it is determined whether the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception flag is set (S811). If the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception flag is not set, the second effect symbol production control process is terminated, and monitoring is continued until the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception flag is set.

  If the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception flag is set in S811, the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception flag is cleared (S812), based on whether or not the fifth gaming state designation command reception flag is set. Whether or not the gaming state is the fifth gaming state is determined (S813). In the case of the fifth gaming state, the special symbol variation pattern designation command stored in the special symbol variation pattern designation command storage area is read (S814), and the special symbol variation pattern designated from the read special symbol variation pattern designation command. It is determined whether or not is a fluctuation pattern for opening a normal electric short (TPB5-4) or a fluctuation pattern for opening a long-term electric power (TPB5-5) (S815). In the case of the fluctuation pattern for the general electric short open or the general electric long open, the normal display setting of the second effect symbol in the effect display device 5 (setting for variable display in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) ) Is executed (S816), and the process proceeds to S818.

  On the other hand, if the game state is not the fifth gaming state in S813, and if it is not the variation pattern for normal power short open or general power long open in S815, the reduced display setting of the second effect symbol in the effect display device 5 (effect symbol display) (Setting for displaying reduced fluctuation on the right side of the areas 5L, 5C, 5R) is executed (S817), and the process proceeds to S818.

  That is, in the high base state, the normal variation display of the second effect symbol is executed only when the variation pattern of the special symbol in the fifth gaming state is the variation pattern for opening the general power (see FIG. 50). In the state, the fourth gaming state, and the fifth gaming state, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is not a variation pattern for releasing the normal power, the reduced variation display of the second effect symbol is executed.

  In S818, the opening notification LED lighting prohibition flag described above is cleared based on the start of the change of the second effect symbol (S819), and the value of the second effect control process flag is set to the second effect symbol change start process. The value is changed to a value corresponding to (S801) (S819), and the normal symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process is terminated. In this way, the variation display of the second effect symbol is executed only in the high base state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception flag is set in S811 in the normal symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting processing in S800, the following second effect symbol effect control process processing is performed. Is to be executed. That is, since the variation display control of the second effect symbol is executed based on the start of the variation display of the special symbol in the high base state, the special symbol is almost simultaneously with the start of the variation display of the normal symbol. If the change display of the game is not started, that is, if the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 does not win the second start winning, the change display of the normal symbol is started, but the change display of the second special symbol and the second effect design is started. Will not start.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a second effect symbol variation start process in the second effect symbol effect control process. In the second effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the gaming state is the fifth gaming state based on whether or not the fifth gaming state designation command reception flag is set. (S813). When it is in the fifth gaming state, it is determined whether or not the display setting of the second effect symbol in the effect display device 5 is the normal display setting (S821). If it is not the fifth gaming state in S820 and the display setting of the second effect symbol in the effect display device 5 is not the normal display setting, that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol in the fifth gaming state is the variation for opening the electric power system. If it is not a pattern, the stop symbol of the second effect symbol is determined according to the display result of the special symbol (S822), and the process proceeds to S830. In S821, when the display setting of the second effect symbol in the effect display device 5 is the normal display setting, that is, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is the variation pattern for opening the normal power, the normal symbol variation display result designation command It is determined whether a reception flag is set (S823). If the normal symbol variation display result designation command reception flag is set, the process proceeds to S824, and if the normal symbol variation display result designation command reception flag is not set, that is, the special symbol has started variation display, but the normal symbol If the fluctuation display has not started (the irregular state in which the fluctuation display of the special symbol fluctuation pattern for the opening of the electric train is started based on the fact that the game ball does not pass the passing gate 41 and the second start winning has occurred. If this occurs, the process proceeds to S828.

  In S824, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not a normal symbol variation display result designation command indicating “per symbol” has been received (S824). When the normal symbol variation display result designation command indicating “per normal” is received, the process proceeds to S825, and when the normal symbol variation display result designation command indicating “displacement (normal deviation)” is received, S828 is performed. Proceed to In S825, after the special symbol variation pattern designation command is read from the special symbol variation pattern designation command storage area (S825), it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation pattern is a variation pattern for normal power long open (S826). ), If it is a variation pattern for normal electric long open, the stop symbol (for example, 555) of the second production symbol of the same (hit) is determined (S827). On the other hand, if the normal symbol variation display result designation command reception flag is not set in S823, if the normal symbol variation display result designation command indicating "displacement (ordinary deviation)" is received in S824, a special symbol is obtained in S826. If the variation pattern is a variation pattern for opening the ordinary electric short circuit, a stop symbol (for example, 567, etc.) of the second production symbol which is not uniform (disconnected) is determined (S828), and the process proceeds to S829.

  In this way, not only when the normal symbol fluctuation display result designation command indicating “out of place (ordinary figure out of date)” is received, or when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for opening the ordinary electric short circuit, but also a game ball Even when an irregular state occurs in which the variation display of the special symbol variation pattern for opening the public power is started based on the fact that the second start prize has occurred without passing through the passage gate 41 Since the stop symbol of the second effect symbol is determined, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the normal winning slot of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 is not opened due to the second effect symbol being prepared, and the player is given an uncomfortable feeling. .

  In S829, the normal symbol variation display result designation command reception flag and the special symbol variation pattern command storage area are cleared and the process proceeds to S830, and a symbol variation control pattern (process table) corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern is selected (S830). . Then, the second effect symbol process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S831).

  Next, the production control CPU 120 performs the production device (the production display device 5 as the production component, the production use) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, etc.). Control of the frame LED 9 and the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. as parts is executed (S832). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123 made of VDP or the like. In addition, a control signal is output to the LED control board 14 and the like in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of the frame LED 9. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the second effect symbol fluctuation time timer (S833), and a value corresponding to the predetermined time is set in the second effect symbol fluctuation control timer. Set (S834). Also, the value of the second effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second effect symbol variation processing (S802) (S835), and the first effect symbol variation start process is terminated.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the second effect symbol changing process (S802) in the second effect symbol effect control process. In the second effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the respective values of the second effect symbol process timer, the second effect symbol variation time timer, and the second effect symbol variation control timer (S840A, S840B, S840C).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second effect symbol process timer has timed out (S841). If the second effect symbol process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (S842). That is, the second effect symbol process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the second effect symbol process timer (S843). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the second effect symbol process data (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) set next, and S847 is performed. (S845). If the second effect symbol process timer has not timed out, the effect device (based on the set second effect symbol process data (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.)) The control state for the production component) is changed and the process proceeds to S847 (S846).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the second effect symbol variation control timer has expired (S847). When the second effect symbol variation control timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the second effect symbol in the middle left and right (after 30 ms has elapsed since the previous display switching time of the second effect symbol). Image data of a screen to be displayed is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (S848). As such, in the effect display device 5, the variation control of the second effect symbol is realized. The display control unit 123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the effect display device 5. Output. As such, the effect display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the effect symbol in the variation of the second effect symbol. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the second effect symbol variation control timer, and the process proceeds to S850 (S849). If the second effect symbol process timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to S850 without executing S848 to S849.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the display setting of the second effect symbol in the effect display device 5 is the normal display setting (S850). If it is the normal display setting, the process proceeds to S850a, and if it is not the normal display setting, the process proceeds to S853. Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol determination command reception flag is set (S850a). If the normal symbol determination command reception flag is not set, the process proceeds to S853, and if the normal symbol determination command reception flag is set. The normal symbol confirmation command reception flag is cleared (S851), and the stop symbol is temporarily derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 50H, the second effect symbol is oscillated and stopped). (S852), the process proceeds to S853.

  In S853, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second effect symbol variation time timer has timed out. If the second effect symbol variation time timer has timed out, the value of the second effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second effect symbol variation stop process (S803) (S856). Even if the second effect symbol variation time timer has not timed out, if the normal symbol confirmation designation command reception flag indicating that the normal symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set, the normal symbol confirmation designation command reception flag is cleared. (S855), the value of the second effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second effect symbol variation stop process (S803) (S856). Even if the second effect symbol variation time timer has not timed out, when the normal symbol confirmation designation command is received, the control shifts to stop the variation, so that, for example, a long variation time is caused due to noise between substrates. Even when the normal symbol variation pattern designation command is received, the variation of the second effect symbol can be ended when the regular ordinary symbol variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the ordinary symbol ends).

  In the process table used for the variation control of the second effect symbol, the process data corresponding to the other effect during the variable effect display of the second effect symbol is set. That is, the sum of the second effect symbol process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variation time of the second effect symbol. Therefore, when the second effect symbol process timer of the last process data n is timed out in the process of S853, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, LED control execution data, etc.), and the second effect based on the process table. The design control of the symbol ends.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the second effect symbol stop process (S803) in the second effect symbol effect control process. In the second effect symbol stop process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the second effect symbol stop period timer is operating (S861). When the second effect symbol stop period timer is not in operation, the effect control CPU 120 derives and displays a predetermined stop symbol of the second effect symbol (S862), and displays the second effect symbol stop period timer in the second effect symbol stop period timer. A value corresponding to the symbol stop period is set and the second effect symbol variation stop process is terminated (S863). Further, when the second effect symbol stop period timer is operating, the value of the second effect symbol stop period timer is decremented by 1 (S864), and it is determined whether or not the second effect symbol stop period timer is up. (S865a). When the second effect symbol stop period timer is not up, the second effect symbol variation stop process is terminated, and when the second effect symbol stop period timer is up, the second effect symbol variation display is stopped. As described above, an open notification LED lighting prohibition flag is set (S866), and it is determined by referring to the received special symbol variation display result designation command whether or not the variation display result is per special symbol (S866).

  If the fluctuation display result is per special figure, the value of the second production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure display process, and the second production symbol fluctuation stop process is terminated (S868). Further, if the variation display result is not per special symbol, the value of the second effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, and the second effect symbol variation stop process is terminated ( S869).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an error notification process (S710) in the effect control main process. In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the error notification execution timer is operating (S981). If the error notification timer is not in operation, it is determined whether an error designation command reception flag is set (S982). If the error designation command reception flag is not set, the error notification process is terminated. If the error designation command reception flag is set, the error command is read out from the error designation command storage area to identify the error type (S983), and the error display corresponding to the identified error type and the effect such as the frame LED 9 are displayed. The LED lighting mode is specified (S984), lighting of the specified error display and the specified LED lighting mode is started (S985), and the error notification execution timer value is set to a predetermined notification time (for example, 1). Minutes, etc.) is set (S986), and the error notification process is terminated.

If the error notification timer is operating in S981, the value of the error notification execution timer is decremented by 1 (S987), and it is determined whether the error notification execution timer has expired (S988). If the error notification execution timer does not time out, the error notification process is terminated.
If the error notification execution timer expires, the error display and the lighting of the effect LED in a mode corresponding to the error are ended (S989), and the error notification process is ended.

  As an example of an error display mode based on the error notification process, for example, as shown in FIG. 46, characters “E-86 gate passing error occurred” are displayed on the effect display device 5. In addition, when the error display is executed, when the first effect symbol or the second effect symbol is changed, the error is displayed more than the first effect symbol or the second effect symbol as shown in FIG. It is preferable to display the display so that the display is preferentially superimposed on the front side. Note that the error display mode is not limited to the above, and can be variously changed.

  Next, an example of the effect display in the effect display device 5 executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the high base state will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effect display on the effect display device in the third gaming state. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effect display on the effect display device in the fourth gaming state. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effect display on the effect display device in the fifth gaming state. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display form of the second effect symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 47, when a special figure of non-probability B is generated in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and the game state is controlled to the third gaming state after the gaming state per special figure, As shown in FIG. 47 (A), the control CPU 120 displays a character “chance zone” on the display screen of the effect display device 5 to notify that it has shifted to the third gaming state, and “within 60 seconds. In addition, a challenge time countdown display image corresponding to the character “○ △ Challenge succeeded and continued right-handed !!” and “variable display time of“ 60 seconds remaining ”is displayed, and a right-handed promotion image is displayed.

  In the first gaming state or the second gaming state, when there is a first reserved memory of the first special symbol at the time of occurrence of the special figure of non-probability B, the first special symbol corresponding to the first reserved memory In response to the variation display, the variation display of the second effect symbol is started. In the first gaming state or the second gaming state, if there is no first reserved memory of the first special symbol at the time when the special symbol of non-probability B occurs, the second special symbol is based on the occurrence of the second start winning In response to the start of the variable display, the second effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the right end of the screen to start the variable display.

  In the third gaming state, the variation display pattern (TPA3-1) or the variation pattern per special diagram (TPB3-1, 2) is selected as the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation display time is long as 60 seconds. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), an image (not shown) for notifying the start of a challenge effect that indicates whether or not the special display is permissible when the variable display is completed corresponds to the variable display time. Update the countdown display image of the challenge time.

  As shown in FIG. 47C, for example, when about 10 seconds before the end of the change, a screen for announcing the result of the challenge effect is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 47D, when the variation display result of the special symbol is out of place, the characters and characters “sorry ...” are displayed and the game state returns to the first gaming state in the low base state. Inform you. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (E), when the special symbol variation display result is per special symbol, a character and a character “success!” Are displayed, which is advantageous over the third gaming state. Notification is made that the game state shifts to the fifth game state or the fourth game state, which is the base state.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (F), when the variation display result in the third gaming state is per special figure of non-probable variation C, an image of “invincible zone entry!” Is displayed during the special figure, When the transition to the fourth gaming state is notified after completion of the special figure, as shown in FIG. 47 (G), when the variation display result in the third gaming state is the special figure of the probability variation C, An image of “rush in!” Is displayed inside, and notification is made that the game state is shifted to the fifth gaming state after completion of the special figure.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48, when a special figure of non-probability variation B occurs in the third gaming state or a special figure of non-probability variation F occurs in the fifth gaming state, When the game state is controlled to the fourth gaming state after the state is over, the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters “invincible zone entry!” On the display screen of the effect display device 5 as shown in FIG. While notifying that the game state has shifted to the fourth gaming state, a right-handed promotion image is displayed.

  In addition, when there are two or more first reserved memories of the first special symbol at the time of occurrence of the special figure of the uncertain change B in the third gaming state or the second gaming state, the first special corresponding to the first reserved memory In response to the symbol variation display, the second effect symbol variation display is started. If the first reserved memory of the first special symbol is 1 or less at the time of occurrence of the special figure of the non-probability change B in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, it is based on the occurrence of the second start winning. In response to the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the second effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the right end of the screen to start the variable display.

  In the fourth gaming state, in the first variation after being controlled to the fourth gaming state, the variation display time of 60 seconds as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation variation pattern (TPA4-1) or the variation per special diagram The pattern (TPB4-1) is selected, and after the second variation, the variation pattern (TPA4-2) or the variation pattern per special diagram (TPB4-2) with a variation display time of 10 seconds is used as the variation pattern of the special symbol. Selected.

  The fluctuation display time of these special symbols is longer than 2.7 seconds, which is the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (FPA2-1), and when the stop symbol per universal symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long opening pattern is executed a plurality of times. In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control has a long open pattern regardless of whether the variation pattern of the special symbol is a deviation variation pattern (FIG. 48 (B)) or the variation pattern per special diagram (FIG. 48 (D)). Every time the ordinary electric accessory release start designation command reception buffer is received, the effect display device 5 displays an image of “+ 1COMBO” indicating that the normal winning opening has been long opened, and the long open pattern in the fourth gaming state. An image such as “Total10COMBO” (see FIG. 48C) or “Total15COMBO” (see FIG. 48E) indicating the total number of times that the opening control of the normal variable winning ball device 27 based on is executed is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the normal winning opening is opened long, an image showing the total number of times that the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long opening pattern is executed in the fourth gaming state is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to the fourth gaming state, but has been long since the transition to the high base state (the third gaming state, the fourth gaming state, the fifth gaming state). You may make it display the image which shows the total frequency | count that opening control of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the opening pattern was performed. Further, the images shown in FIGS. 48C and 48E are displayed when the release control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long release pattern is executed in the third game state or the fifth game state. Also good.

  If the variation pattern of the special symbol is the variation pattern per special symbol (TPA4-1-2), as shown in FIG. 48 (F), is the fourth game state maintained by the variation display result of the special symbol? An effect suggesting whether to fall into the fifth gaming state is started.

  Then, when the variation display result of the special symbol is for the special symbol of the non-probability variation D, an effect image as shown in FIG. 48 (G) that is successful in avoiding danger is displayed, and the fourth gaming state continues. Inform you. In this way, when the variation display result of the special symbol is out of place or when it is per the special diagram of the non-probability variation D, the fifth gaming state continues, so the processing of FIGS. 48 (B) to 48 (H) is performed. Repeatedly. On the other hand, if the variation display result of the special symbol is per probability variation D special diagram, an effect image as shown in FIG. Inform.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when a special figure of probability variation B occurs in the first gaming state or the second gaming state or a special figure per probability figure C occurs in the third gaming state, When the game state is controlled to the fifth gaming state after the end of the state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters “rush rush!” On the display screen of the effect display device 5 as shown in FIG. While notifying that the game state has shifted to the five gaming state, a right-handed promotion image is displayed.

  In addition, when there is a first reserved memory of the first special symbol at the time of occurrence of the special figure of probability variation B in the first gaming state or the second gaming state (2 or more when going through the third gaming state), In response to the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first reserved storage, the variable display of the second effect symbol is started. When there is no first reserved memory of the first special symbol at the time of occurrence of the special figure of the non-probability change B in the first gaming state or the second gaming state (when passing through the third gaming state, there is one or more reserved memories) If there is, the variable display of the second effect symbol is started in response to the start of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the occurrence of the second start winning.

  In the fifth gaming state, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is the variation pattern for opening the public power (TPB 5-4 to 5) (FIG. 49B), the variation display of the second effect symbol shown in FIG. When the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed and the variation pattern (TPB5-1 to TPB5-1 to TPB5-1 to 3) other than the one for opening the utility power (FIG. 49 (C)), as illustrated in FIG. 49 (D), the variation of the special symbol Depending on the display result, an effect that suggests whether the fifth gaming state is maintained, promoted to the fourth gaming state, or falls to the first gaming state is executed.

  If the special symbol variation display result is per special symbol of the non-probability variation F, an effect image as if winning the battle as shown in FIG. 49 (E) is displayed and promoted to the fourth gaming state. Is notified. On the other hand, if the change display result of special symbol is per special figure of probability change E, special figure of non-probability change F, or special figure of non-probability change E, it seems that the battle was defeated as shown in FIG. An effect image is displayed. In this case, if the fluctuation display result of the special symbol is per special figure of probability change E or special figure of non-probability change F, a revival effect (not shown) is subsequently executed and promoted to the fourth gaming state or the fifth Notify that the gaming state will continue. Further, when the variation display result of the special symbol is per special symbol of the non-probability variation E, it is notified that the image defeated in the battle is displayed and falls to the first gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the fourth game state and the fifth game state, when the special symbol variation pattern is a variation pattern for opening the general electric train, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), the special symbol variation In response to the start of the display, based on the normal display settings, the second effect symbols start to be displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. In addition, the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27, not the display result of the special symbol, is used as the second effect symbol by using a symbol consisting of Chinese numerals having a different form from the first effect symbol consisting of Arabic numerals. It can be recognized that the type of pattern is notified.

  When the special symbol variation pattern is a variation pattern for the open-circuit short circuit (FIG. 50B), as shown in FIG. 50C, the special symbol variation display is more than the normal symbol variation display. At the time of stopping first, the stop symbol (for example, 567, etc.) of the second effect symbol that is not uniform is stopped and displayed.

  Next, when the normal symbol variation display stops (FIG. 50D), the opening control of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the short opening pattern is executed (FIG. 50E). When the opening control of the normally variable winning ball device 27 based on the short opening pattern is executed, the lighting control of the opening notification LED 36 is not executed. Also, the winning display process is not executed (FIG. 50F).

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is a variation pattern for the ordinary electric long open (FIG. 50 (G)), as shown in FIG. 50 (H), the variation display of the normal symbol is more than the variation display of the special symbol. At the time of stopping first, the stop symbol (for example, stopping in a state where it has been shaken) is temporarily stopped and displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (I), when the change display of the special symbol is stopped, the stop symbol (for example, 555) of the second effect symbol that is the same as the symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to the stop display, the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long opening pattern is executed (FIG. 50 (J)). In addition, with the execution of the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long opening pattern, the lighting of the opening notification LED 36 is started.

  Further, when a game ball is won at the normal winning opening during the execution of the opening control of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long opening pattern, as shown in FIG. Winning display processing such as display of an image showing the number of balls and output of sound effects is executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, the effect control CPU 120 has a special symbol variation pattern for opening the ordinary electric short circuit in the fifth gaming state (high base state). In the case of the variation pattern, since it is substantially impossible to expect a ball even if the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is executed, the second effect symbol is displayed in an irregular pattern and the variation pattern of the special symbol is changed. In the case of the variation pattern for the ordinary electric long opening, the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is executed, so that the player can expect a ball. Therefore, the second effect symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately control the variation display of the second effect symbol.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts the second effect symbol variation display in response to the start of the special symbol variation display, and the special symbol variation display ends (stop display). The variation display result is derived and displayed. However, as the variation display result of the second effect symbol, a mode based on the variation display state of the normal symbol and the variation display state of the special symbol can be derived and displayed. In other words, whether or not the opening control of the normal variable winning ball device 27 is performed based on the short opening pattern or the long opening pattern depends on whether or not the special symbol variation display is being executed when the normal symbol is stopped. Therefore, the variation display result of the second effect symbol is derived and displayed based on the variation display state of the normal symbol and the variation display state of the special symbol.

  As a result, even when the normal symbol variation display result is per unit in the high base state and the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is executed, the game is performed when the normal winning opening is opened in the short opening pattern. Since it is not advantageous to the player, it is advantageous to the player when the irregular winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the variation display of the second effect symbol, or when the normal winning opening is opened with the long open pattern, the second effect symbol As a variable display result, it is possible to stop display with uniform symbols. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort by opening the normal winning opening with the short opening pattern even though the second effect symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in the high base state, when the stop symbol per universal symbol is stopped and displayed in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second effect symbols together and stops and displays the symbols in the second effect. The change display result of the second effect symbol can be a display result corresponding to the display result of the normal symbol, while the start of the symbol variation display corresponds to the start of the variation of the special symbol variation display.

  In addition, in the high base state, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the second effect symbol with an irregular pattern. The fluctuation display result can be a display result corresponding to the display result of the normal symbol.

  Further, the CPU 103 can determine one of a plurality of special symbol variation patterns having different variation display times based on the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the gaming state, and the effect control CPU 120 is in the high base state. When the special symbol variation display is stopped and the stop symbol per universal symbol is stopped and displayed, the game state (low base state) per special symbol is in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the short opening pattern. Open control is executed. In other words, even in the high base state, if the variation pattern for opening the ordinary short circuit is determined as the variation pattern per special symbol for the special symbol, the gaming state at the time when the stop symbol per universal symbol is stopped is displayed as the special symbol. The opening control of the normally variable winning ball device 27 based on the short opening pattern is executed by entering the winning game state, that is, the low base state.

  In this way, even in the high base state, it is normally variable depending on whether or not it is in the gaming state per special figure when the stop symbol per universal figure is stopped and displayed by the variable display time of the special symbol. The opening pattern of the winning ball apparatus 27 can be either a short opening pattern that is disadvantageous to the player or a long opening pattern that is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the CPU 103 specifies a display time corresponding to the variation pattern before the special figure and the type per special figure from a plurality of different display times in S312 in the special figure end process, and sets a value corresponding to the display time. By executing the process of setting the hit end display timer and ending the special figure end process, the time from the completion of the opening control of the special variable winning ball device 7 to the end of the game state per special figure (effect) The period during which the control CPU 120 executes the ending effect) can be changed.

  By doing so, it is possible to change the period from the end of the opening control of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the end of the gaming state per special figure, that is, the period of the low base state. The opening pattern of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 can be either a short opening pattern that is disadvantageous to the player or a long opening pattern that is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, on the right side of the effect display device 5 in the game area, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 can enter the second start winning opening of the second normal winning ball device 6B that is disposed immediately below the passing gate 41. By providing the game ball path, it is possible to establish the special start condition and the normal start condition almost simultaneously with the passage of one game ball.

  In this way, it is possible to correspond the start timing of the special symbol variation display to the normal symbol variation display.

  In addition, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is the non-reach variation pattern (TPA 4-1 to 2) in the fourth gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect shown in FIG.

  In this way, for example, in the fourth gaming state, when the high base state continues due to the variation display result of the special symbol becoming an out-of-display result, the second effect symbol is stopped and displayed in an irregular pattern. Instead, a special effect different from the variation display of the second effect symbol is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

  In addition, when a special symbol hit occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol in the first gaming state, the CPU 103 changes to the second gaming state (low base state) after completion of the game per special symbol at a rate of about 98%. If a special figure hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol in the second gaming state, the game is controlled to the second gaming state (low base state) after the game per special figure is finished at a rate of about 98%. .

  In this way, for example, even if the player hits the second start winning opening where the game ball easily enters in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, it is difficult to enter the high base state. It is possible to eliminate the capture elements such as aiming at the starting prize opening, and to eliminate injustice among players.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention, a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 on the right side of the effect display device 5 in the game area is within a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds). Is provided with a game ball path capable of entering the second start winning opening of the second normal winning ball apparatus 6B arranged immediately below the passing gate 41, and the CPU 103 displays a stop symbol per normal figure in a stopped manner. If the change display of the special symbol is finished, the release control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is executed based on the short release pattern, and the special symbol is displayed when the stop symbol per normal symbol is stopped. Is in a variable display, the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is executed based on the long opening pattern. That is, the opening control period of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 can be changed according to the timing at which the specific display result corresponding to the variable symbol display period is derived and displayed.

  In this way, by adjusting the timing at which the special symbol variation display result is derived and displayed, the period during which the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 is changed to the first normal state (the normal winning opening state) is changed. Since it is possible to realize a new gameability that is different, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

  That is, the CPU 103 can change the timing for stopping and displaying the symbols per special symbol by determining one of a plurality of special symbol variation patterns having different variation display times. Since it is possible to determine whether the ball device 27 is opened based on the short opening pattern or the long opening pattern, the opening control period of the normal variable winning ball device 27 is based on the fluctuation display time or the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol or the special symbol. The opening control period of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 can be changed by adjusting the fluctuation display period of the normal symbol and the fluctuation display period of the special symbol instead of changing the normal symbol. it can.

  51A is a diagram showing a special symbol variation pattern as a modification of the present invention, and FIG. 51B is a diagram showing an example of high-speed digestion of the first special symbol. In the above embodiment, a special figure of probability variation B or non-probability variation B occurs in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and the high base state (the third gaming state or the fifth gaming state) after the termination of the special figure. In the first gaming state or the second gaming state, when there is a first reserved memory of the first special symbol at the time of occurrence of a special variation of probability variation B or non-probability variation B in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, the high base state (third In the gaming state or the fifth gaming state), an example is shown in which the variation display of the second effect symbol may be started in response to the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first reserved memory. However, when there is a first reserved memory when shifting to the high base state, the change display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first reserved memory may be digested at high speed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), as the special symbol variation pattern, the CPU 103 is for high-speed digestion of the first special symbol from among a plurality of special symbol variation patterns having different variation display times. The non-reach variation pattern (TPC1-1) and the (non-reach) special pattern variation pattern (TPD1-1) may be selected with a variation display time of 200 ms shorter than other variation patterns.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), for example, in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, a special figure of probability variation B occurs, and after completion of the special figure, a high base state (fifth gaming state) ), When there are 3 first reserved memories of the first special symbol at the time of occurrence of the special figure of probability variation B in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, the first based on these first reserved memories High speed fluctuation display of one special symbol is executed continuously three times.

  In this way, when there is the first reserved memory of the first special symbol when shifting to the high base state, when the transition is made to the high base state, the rapid digestion is performed based on the fluctuation pattern for high-speed digestion. Since the player can digest the fluctuation display based on the first reserved memory before the player performs the right-handed and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, the right-hand strike is made according to the start of the high base state. If it starts, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are started almost at the same time. Therefore, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed right-handed during the digestion of the fluctuation display based on the first reserved memory. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a time lag between the normal symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display due to the start.

  In addition, when the variation display of the effect symbol corresponding to the first reserved memory of the first special symbol is quickly digested based on the variation pattern for high-speed digestion, the effect control CPU 120 displays the stop symbol of the effect symbol. A combination of predetermined effect symbols (for example, a combination of effect symbols determined last time or a combination of effect symbols prepared in advance) may be derived and displayed as a variable display result without performing lottery of the combinations. In this way, in order to derive and display a uniform effect symbol as a result of variation display of the effect symbol by high-speed digestion, the process can be simplified by omitting the lottery of the combination of the stop display symbols of the effect symbol.

  Then, when the CPU 120 for effect control is controlled to the fifth gaming state which is the high base state, as described above, the variation display of the second effect symbol is started according to the variation display of the special symbol. When the variation patterns TPC1-1 and TPD1-1 for high-speed digestion are determined as the special symbol variation pattern due to the presence of the first reserved memory when controlled to the fifth gaming state, the variation display of the special symbol is finished. Based on this, it is preferable to stop and display the irregular second effect symbols without stopping the matching second effect symbols that are the special display results.

  In this way, the change display by the first reserved memory stored when the low base state is controlled to the high base state is quickly digested, and one game ball is passed through the passing gate 41 and the second start. It is possible to quickly shift to a game by entering the winning opening within a predetermined time. In addition, since the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the normal symbol are not synchronized, the release control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long release pattern is not performed, so the second effect design that is not uniform is stopped. By displaying, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention, a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is placed on the right side of the effect display device 5 in the gaming area within 0.2 seconds. A game ball path is provided that can enter the second start winning opening of the second normal winning ball apparatus 6B arranged immediately below, and the CPU 103 sets the value of the gate switch counter to “5” in S411 in the error determination process. If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but does not enter the second start winning opening within 0.2 seconds, it is determined that an error has occurred in S412. To do.

  By doing in this way, the situation where the normal symbol variation display is executed alone can be determined as abnormal.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, but the second start winning is not generated, that is, the abnormal start is determined based on the fact that the normal start condition is satisfied but the special start condition is not satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as one of the special start condition and the normal start condition is satisfied and the other is not satisfied. By doing in this way, the situation where either the special symbol variation display or the normal symbol variation display is executed alone can be determined as abnormal. Thus, for example, it is determined that the game ball is abnormal based on the fact that the second start winning has occurred even though the game ball has not passed through the passing gate 41, that is, the special start condition is satisfied but the normal start condition is not satisfied. It may be.

  The CPU 103 adds 1 to the value of the gate switch counter in S411 when the gate switch 21 is in the on state in S401 in the error determination process, and S420 when the second start port switch 22B is in the on state in S402. The gate switch counter value is reset to 0, and if it is determined in S411 in the error determination process that the gate switch counter value has become "5", it is determined in S412 that an error has occurred.

  By doing in this way, since it is not determined that the entry is abnormal until the value of the gate switch counter reaches a predetermined value, erroneous determination of abnormality can be prevented. In addition, the gate switch counter value is incremented by 1 when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, and the gate switch counter value is decremented by 1 according to the winning at the second start winning opening. Since it is possible to determine an abnormality, the program capacity can be reduced.

  If the CPU 103 determines that the value of the gate switch counter has reached “5” in S411 in the error determination process, the CPU 103 determines that an error has occurred in S412 and executes security signal output setting processing in S413. If the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the error designation command reception flag is set in S922 in the error notification process, the process of S923 to S925 is executed, and a gate passage error occurs as shown in FIG. Inform you.

  In this way, it is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of an abnormality outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that a store clerk or the like of the game hall monitors whether or not there is a possibility of fraud. It becomes easy.

  Further, the CPU 103 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the second state where the special winning opening is closed in the other error determination processing of S403 in the error determination processing of S22 of the timer interruption processing. When there is a winning game ball, that is, when there is a winning game ball when the value of the special symbol process flag is not a value corresponding to the open processing per special figure, or the normal variable winning ball device 27 is awarded the normal winning. When the game ball is won while the mouth is controlled to be in the second normal state, that is, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is not a value corresponding to the processing during the normal electric game object opening If there is a ball winning, it can be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred.

  In addition, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed from the first state (open state of the big prize opening) to the second state (closed state of the big prize opening), and then a preset grace period (for example, the big prize opening is closed). When there is a win in the winning ball detection waiting time set assuming that the ball biting sometimes occurs and the winning is delayed, or when the normal variable winning ball device 27 is in the first normal state (opening the normal winning opening) State) to the second normal state (normal winning port closed state) and then a pre-set grace period (for example, assuming that when the normal winning port is closed, a ball bite occurs and the winning is delayed. If there is a winning in the set winning ball detection waiting time), an error (abnormal) is not determined in S403.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, as described above, changing the period from the end of the opening control of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the end of the gaming state per special figure, that is, the period of the low base state In order to make it possible to change the opening pattern of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 to either a short opening pattern that is disadvantageous to the player or a long opening pattern that is advantageous to the player, In S312 in the end process, the display time corresponding to the special pattern per special figure and the type per special figure is specified from a plurality of different display times, and a value corresponding to the display time is set in the end display timer per special figure. By executing the process of ending the special figure end process, the time from the completion of the opening control of the special variable winning ball device 7 to the end of the gaming state per special figure (production) Patronage CPU120 is adapted to be able to vary the period) to perform the ending effect.

  In this case, for example, in S <b> 312 in the special figure end process, the grace period elapses as the display time from the end of the opening control of the special variable winning ball device 7 to the end of the gaming state per special figure. If a display time is set so that the game state per special figure will be completed before the game is completed, a special period will be given after the grace period after the game state per special figure is completed, that is, when there is a winning in the winning ball detection waiting time. When the value of the symbol process flag is not a value corresponding to the processing during opening per special symbol, it is determined that there is a prize for the game ball and it is determined that the prize is abnormal. Therefore, when there is a winning in the grace period, it is possible to appropriately determine the winning abnormality of the special variable winning ball device 7 and the ordinary variable winning ball device 27 by not determining that the winning is abnormal.

  If the CPU 120 for effect control determines in step S782 in the release notification effect control process of S780 in the second effect symbol effect control process process that the release notification LED lighting prohibition flag has been set, the effect control CPU 120 uses the notification function for release notification in S783. The process proceeds to S784 without starting the lighting of the LED 36. That is, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is released based on the long opening pattern without executing the special symbol fluctuation display after the opening notification LED 36 is turned on, the start of the opening notification LED 36 is started. Limit.

  In this way, by turning on the opening notification LED 36, the player can easily recognize that the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is open based on the long opening pattern, and the opening notification LED 36 is improperly used. It is possible to prevent the lighting from starting.

[Light emission effect by LED for effect]
Next, the timing at which the light-emitting effect is produced by each LED of the opening notification LED 36, the right-handed notification LED 37, the passing effect LEDs 38a to 38c, and the ball number notification LED 39, and the effect LEDs The mode of the light emission effect will be described with reference to FIGS.

  At the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 52, the gaming state is controlled to the low base state (the first gaming state or the second gaming state), the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, and the first special figure Assume that the number of reserved memories is zero. At this time, in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect display device 5 executes the variable display of the first effect symbols (the alphanumeric symbols “1” to “9”). The frame LED 9 is lit in yellow, which is a light emission color corresponding to the gaming state being not the gaming state per special figure and the low base state (see FIG. 55 (1)). On the other hand, the ball number notification LED 39 (all seven segments from the first digit to the fifth digit), the passing effect LEDs 38a to 38c, the opening notification LED 36, and the right-handed notification LED 37 are all turned off. ing.

  Next, at the timing of T2, the special display (design per symbol) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol that is the display result of the variation of the first special symbol. A stop symbol (for example, 777) of the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 55 (2)). Here, it is assumed that the type per generated special map is probability variation B. At this time, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5, a frame is displayed in accordance with the fact that the same effect symbols are aligned. While the lighting color of the LED 9 changes from yellow to blue, all of the passage-time effect LEDs 38a, 38b, and 38c are switched from the unlit state to the lit state.

  When the symbol per special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A, the gaming state per special symbol is started at a timing T3 when a predetermined symbol fixed stop period has elapsed. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a start-per-spec command (command A0XXH) and a right-handed lighting start specification command (command 9C01H) with the start of the game state per special figure. The CPU 120 for effect control shifts to the fifth gaming state in response to receiving the start designation command (command A0XXH) per special figure and the type per special figure generated is the probability variation B. A rush rushing effect for informing this is executed. When the rush entry effect is executed, for example, a message “Preparing for rush entry ...” is displayed on the effect display device 5 (see FIG. 55 (3)).

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 switches the right-handed notification LED 37 from the unlit state to the lit state in response to receiving the right-handed lighting start designation command (command 9C01H). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has received a right-handed lighting start designation command (command 9C01H) and a special figure of probability variation B that shifts to an advantageous section (fourth game state or fifth game state) has occurred. Accordingly, the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter (0 in this example) stored in the RAM 122 is displayed on the ball number notification LED 39 (that is, 0 is turned on in the 7th segment of the first digit). Then, update of the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter is started (start of counting). It should be noted that the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter is determined only by receiving the right-handed lighting start designation command (command 9C01H) regardless of whether or not the type of special chart is shifted to the advantageous section. You may make it display on LED39 for number notification.

  Here, as described above, because of the occurrence of the special figure, the gaming control microcomputer 100 receives the special designation start opening command (command A1XXH), the special prize opening in addition to the special designation start designation command. An after-opening designation command (command A2XXH) and an end designation command per command (command A3XXH) are transmitted, and effects (fanfare effect, round effect, ending effect) corresponding to each command can be executed. However, in the example of FIGS. 52 and 55 (3), the effect control CPU 120 performs a rush entry effect over the period from the start to the end of the gaming state per special figure in response to the reception of the special designation start designation command. The rush entry effect will be continued without interruption even if a special command during opening of the special prize opening, a designation command after opening the special prize opening, and an end designation command per special figure are received. . That is, as shown in FIG. 52, the rush entry effect of the present embodiment is an effect including an effect equivalent to a fanfare effect (T3 to T3a), a round effect (T3a to T3b), and an ending effect (T3b to T4). It is.

  Next, since the type per special figure generated this time is the probability variation B, the gaming state is changed from the low base state to the high base state (fifth) at the timing of T4 in FIG. Transition to gaming state. At this time, in response to the fifth gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character “rush rush!” On the display screen of the effect display device 5 to notify that the game state has shifted to the fifth gaming state. In addition, a right-handed acceleration image is displayed (see FIG. 56 (4)). Further, the frame LED 9 changes from yellow to red, which is an emission color corresponding to the gaming state being the high base state.

  Thus, in this embodiment, even when a special figure hit occurs in a low base state, the right-handed notification LED 37 is turned on in response to being controlled to the gaming state per special figure ( 52 (T3 in FIG. 52 and FIG. 55 (3)), since the period controlled to the gaming state per special figure has not yet shifted to the high base state, only the right-handed promotion notification by the right-handed notification LED 37 is assumed. Even if the player plays a right-handed game according to the above, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the normal winning opening and there is a possibility that it will be wasted. On the other hand, the effect display device 5 is provided as a right-handed promotion means different from the right-handed notification LED 37, and right-handed promotion is performed at the timing controlled to the high base state (the timing at which the gaming state per special figure is finished). By displaying an image (a character “right-handed” and a right-pointing arrow), it becomes possible to perform a right-handed promotion notification at an appropriate timing at which the player does not make a wasteful hit.

  Next, the player has made a right-handed game by shifting to the fifth gaming state, and at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 52, the game ball launched into the right gaming area passes through the passing gate 41 and almost simultaneously 2 It is assumed that it has passed through the starting prize opening. Here, at the timing of T5, the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the normal symbol normal process and the variable waiting timer has timed out, so that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. The normal symbol variation display is started (that is, the passage becomes effective). In addition, at the timing of T5, the value of the special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process and the first special symbol holding memory number is 0, so that the game ball to the second start winning opening is Based on the approach, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, the approach becomes valid). In this case, the special symbol type wins for the special symbol with the probability variation E (continuation of rush), and the special symbol variation pattern is selected as the special symbol variation pattern. Suppose that the variation pattern for the selected is selected.

  At this time, the change display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 and the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B are started almost simultaneously at the same time. The variation display of the second effect symbol is executed in conjunction with the variation display of the symbol or the normal symbol (see FIG. 56 (5)). In addition, in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 has passed the passing gate 41 and entered the second start winning opening within the predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds) (predetermined). Based on the fact that the start condition of the normal symbol variation display and the special symbol variation display start condition are satisfied within the period, among the passage effect LEDs 38a to 38c, the passage effect above the pass gate 41 The LEDs 38a and 38b are both switched from the lit state to the unlit state, and the passing effect LED 38c between the passing gate 41 and the second normal winning ball device 6B is switched from the lit state to the blinking state.

  Thus, when the start condition (the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and the game ball has entered the second start winning opening) is established, the passing effect LEDs 38a and 38b are turned off from the on state. By switching to, it is possible to enhance the effect when the start condition is satisfied. In addition, when the starting condition is satisfied, unlike the other passage-time effect LEDs 38a and 38b, there is a passage-time effect LED 38c that switches from a lighting state to a blinking state that is a special state different from both the lighting state and the extinguishing state. By being present, it is possible to further enhance the effect when the start condition is satisfied.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the passing effect LEDs 38a to 38c are all lit in the low base state, a game ball passes through the passing gate 41, or a game is played at the second start winning opening. When a ball enters, the lighting state LED 38a and 38b are maintained in the lighting state without switching to the off state, and the lighting state LED 38c is maintained in the lighting state without switching to the blinking state. And In this way, only when the start condition is established in the high base state, the passing effect LEDs 38a and 38b are switched from the lighting state to the extinguishing state, and the passing effect LED 38c is switched from the lighting state to the blinking state. It is possible to enhance the effect when the start condition is satisfied in the high base state.

  Unlike the present embodiment, it does not depend on the gaming state (for example, whether it is a low base state or a high base state, and whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state). ), When the passing ball 41 passes through the passing gate 41 when the passing effect LEDs 38a to 38c are all lit, or when the game ball enters the second start winning opening, The effect LEDs 38a and 38b may be switched to a light-off state, and the passage-time effect LED 38c may be switched to a blinking state.

  Also, unlike the present embodiment, when the passing effect LEDs 38a to 38c are all lit, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, or the game ball enters the second start winning opening. In such a case, all of the passing-time effect LEDs 38a, 38b, and 38c may be switched to the unlit state.

  In this embodiment, the starting condition for the normal symbol variation display (the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41) and the special symbol variation display starting condition (the game ball has entered the second start winning opening). The light emission mode of the passing effect LEDs 38a, 38b, and 38c is changed according to the fact that both of the above are established, but not limited to this, the start condition of the normal symbol variation display and the variation of the special symbol The light emission mode of the passage-time effect LEDs 38a, 38b, and 38c may be changed according to the fact that only one of the display start conditions is satisfied.

  In addition, an LED for passing effect that changes the light emission mode according to the start condition of the normal symbol variation display, and the passage that changes the light emission mode according to the start condition of the special symbol variation display is satisfied. The time effect LED may be different, for example, the light emission mode of the passage time effect LEDs 38a and 38b is changed from the lighting mode to the extinguishing mode in response to the start condition of the normal symbol variation display being satisfied. In addition, the light emission mode of the passing effect LED 38c may be changed from the lighting mode to the extinguishing mode (or the flashing mode) in accordance with the establishment of the special symbol variation display start condition.

Further, in the present embodiment, the passage-time effect LEDs 38a and 38b are configured to change from the lighting mode to the light-off mode according to the establishment of the starting condition. It is only necessary that a change in which the visibility for the player is lowered according to the establishment of the start condition occurs. For example, the passing effect LEDs 38a and 38b can be dimmed when the effect control CPU 120 outputs a control signal to the LED control board 14 and are continuously lit even after the start condition is satisfied. The total luminous flux (lumen (lm)) after the condition is satisfied may be lower than that before the start condition is satisfied. Further, the light intensity (candela (cd)) may be decreased according to the establishment of the start condition, and the surface of the target object (for example, the surface of the object installed at the position of the player's line of sight) according to the establishment of the start condition. ) Illuminance (lux (lx)) and luminance (candela (cd / m ² )) may be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (5), even when the passing effect LEDs 38a and 38b are switched from the lit state to the unlit state (when visibility for the player is lowered), the number of balls is notified. The value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter (0 in this example) is continuously displayed on the LED 39, and the visibility of the advantageous section prize ball number is not lowered. Thus, even if some of the effect LEDs (passage effect LEDs 38a and 38b) are extinguished, the player is interested in other effect LEDs (ball number notification LEDs). By continuously displaying the information (the number of advantageous section prize balls), the interest of the game is prevented from deteriorating.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, at the timing of T6 in FIG. 52 when a predetermined time (400 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the passage effect LEDs 38a and 38b are switched off and the passage effect LED 38c is switched to the blinking state. Then, the relighting control is performed to return all the lighting LEDs 38a to 38c to the lighting state (see FIG. 56 (6)).

  As described above, the passing effect LEDs 38a and 38b that are once turned off are turned on again, and the passing effect LED 38c that is once flashed is turned on again. Can be improved. In addition, by performing re-lighting control before the variation display of the second effect symbol is finished, the same effect symbol is displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as a result of the variation display of the second effect symbol. When the symbols are in a uniform state, for example, an effect of changing the light emission color of the passing effect LEDs 38a to 38c that are all lit, or a passing effect LED 38a that is all lit. After turning off 38b and 38c in order from the top, it is possible to execute an effect or the like that turns on all of them simultaneously at the same time.

  Here, based on the fact that the long variation pattern has been determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 stops the second representation symbol (in this example, at timing T7 shown in FIG. 52). 555 is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 57 (7)). At this time, in response to the execution of the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long opening pattern, the opening notification LED 36 is lit in blue. Thus, the player grasps that the normal winning opening is long open, and plays a game so that the game ball enters the normal winning opening.

  Next, the CPU 120 for effect control stops and displays (determines and stops) the stop symbol (55 in this example) of the second effect symbol at the timing of T7a shown in FIG. 52 when the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped. In addition, the game state is shifted from the high base state to the low base state at the timing when the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game state per special figure. Here, it is assumed that one game ball fired in the right game area wins at the time of T8 in the normal winning opening that is long open (see FIG. 57 (8)). At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control adds 10 to the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter in response to the reception (one time) of the ordinary electric accessory winning designation command (command C600H) and the updated value ( In this example, 10) is displayed on the ball number notification LED 39. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 gives the effect display device 5 the number of award balls (“+10” in this example) paid out during the long open period and the value of the updated advantageous section award ball counter (this number). In the example, “total10”) is displayed. In this way, it is possible to count the number of advantageous section winning balls based on the ordinary electric accessory winning designation command (command C600H).

  Next, it is assumed that four game balls launched into the right game area have won a prize at the timing of T9 shown in FIG. 53 in the long-opened normal winning opening (see FIG. 57 (9)). At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control adds 40 to the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter in response to the reception (four times) of the ordinary electric accessory winning designation command (command C600H) and the updated value ( In this example, 50) is displayed on the LED 39 for notification of the number of balls. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 gives the effect display device 5 the number of prize balls paid out during the long open period (“+50” in this example) and the value of the advantageous zone prize ball counter after the update (this book). In the example, “total50”) is displayed.

  Next, it is assumed that at the timing of T10 shown in FIG. 53 within the long release period, the game ball launched into the right game area passes through the passing gate 41 and passes through the second start winning opening almost simultaneously (FIG. 58). (See (10)). Here, at the timing of T10, since the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the processing during the normal electric-powered object opening, even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol variation display starts. (I.e., passing is invalid). Further, at the timing of T10, the value of the special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to any one of the pre-opening process per special figure, the opening process per special figure, and the end process per special figure. Even if the game ball enters the start winning opening, the change display of the second special symbol is not executed (that is, the entry becomes invalid).

  In addition, since the gaming state is the low base state at the timing of T10, the effect control CPU 120 passes the game ball through the passage gate 41 and within the predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds). 2 Even when entering the start winning opening, the above-mentioned [control for switching the passing effect LEDs 38a and 38b from the lit state to the unlit state] and [control for switching the passing effect LED 38c from the lit state to the blinking state] Neither control is executed. In other words, all the on-pass performance LEDs 38a to 38c that are in the lit state are maintained in the lit state.

  In this way, even when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol variation display is not executed, and when the game ball enters the second start winning opening, the special symbol variation display is not executed. By not executing any of the above-mentioned controls for switching the passing effect LEDs 38a and 38b from the lit state to the unlit state and the control for switching the passing effect LEDs 38c from the lit state to the blinking state, the player can It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the normal symbol variation display is executed, and misunderstanding that the special symbol variation display is executed.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 changes the light emission color of the open notification LED 36 in the lit state in response to the game ball entering the second start winning opening during the period in which the normal winning opening is long open. Change from blue to red. The player can easily recognize that the normal winning opening is long open because the open notification LED 36 is in a lit state, and the game ball is second when the emission color is changed from blue to red. It is possible to grasp that the vehicle has entered the starting prize opening.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and enters the second starting winning opening during the long opening period of the normal winning opening, the above-mentioned [passing state effect LEDs 38a and 38b are turned off from the on state] [Control to switch to ON] and [Control to switch LED 38c for passing effect from lighting state to blinking state] are not executed, but instead of these controls, the light emission mode of open notification LED 36 in the lighting state is changed. By performing the effect, the winning at the second start winning opening is notified and the interest is prevented from being lowered.

  It should be noted that not only when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening during the period in which the normal prize opening is long open, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period during which the normal prize opening is long open ( For example, when the game ball passes through a predetermined area, the light emission mode of the open notification LED 36 may be changed. For example, the emission color of the open notification LED 36 may be changed in response to the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 during the period in which the normal winning opening is long open, and the normal winning opening is long open. The release notification LED 36 emits light in response to the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 within the predetermined period and entering the second start winning opening within the predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds). The color may be changed. In addition, the emission color of the opening notification LED 36 may be changed in response to a predetermined number (for example, 5) or more of game balls entering the normal winning opening during the long opening period of the normal winning opening. good.

  Next, at the timing shown in T11 of FIG. 53, it is assumed that the long open period of the normal winning opening ends and the ordinary power is closed (see FIG. 58 (11)). Accordingly, the effect control CPU 120 switches the open notification LED 36 from the lighting state to the extinguishing state. Further, the gaming control microcomputer 100 changes the gaming state to the low base state at the timing shown in T11a of FIG. 53 in response to winning of the special figure per type of special variation E (continue rush). To the high base state and continue the advantageous section. At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the value (50 in this example) of the advantageous section prize ball number counter as the advantageous section continues (does not fall into the first gaming state (low probability low base)). It is continuously displayed on the LED 39 for number notification and the effect display device 5.

  Next, because the fifth gaming state has continued, the player continues to play the right-handed game, and at the timing T12 shown in FIG. 53, the game ball launched into the right gaming area passes through the passing gate 41 and is almost simultaneously. It is assumed that it has passed the second start winning opening. Here, at the timing of T12, since the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the normal symbol normal processing and the variable waiting timer has timed out, the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. The normal symbol variation display is started (that is, the passage becomes effective). In addition, at the timing of T12, the value of the special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process and the first special symbol holding memory number is 0, so that the game ball to the second start winning opening is Based on the approach, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, the approach becomes valid). In this case, the special symbol type wins for the special symbol with the probability variation E (continuation of rush), and the special symbol variation pattern is selected as the special symbol variation pattern. Suppose that the variation pattern for the selected is selected.

  At this time, the change display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 and the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B are started almost simultaneously at the same time. The variation display of the second effect symbol is executed in conjunction with the variation display of the symbol or the normal symbol (see FIG. 58 (12)). In addition, in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 has passed the passing gate 41 and entered the second start winning opening within the predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds) (predetermined). Based on the fact that the start condition of the normal symbol variation display and the special symbol variation display start condition are satisfied within the period), as described above, the passage effect LEDs 38a to 38c are located above the passage gate 41. The passing effect LEDs 38a and 38b are both switched from the lit state to the unlit state, and the passing effect LED 38c between the pass gate 41 and the second ordinary winning ball device 6B is switched from the lit state to the blinking state. .

  Here, even when the passing effect LEDs 38a and 38b are turned off, the ball number notification LED 39 continuously displays the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter (50 in this example). Yes. In this way, while reducing the visibility of the light emission effect by the passing-time effect LEDs 38a and 38b, the interest of the player is prevented from being lowered, so that the interest is not lowered. .

  Next, the CPU 120 for effect control is at the timing of T12a in FIG. 53 when a predetermined time (400 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the LED LEDs for passing effect 38a and 38b are turned off and the LED for effecting passing time 38c is switched to the blinking state. Then, re-lighting control is performed to return all of the passage-time effect LEDs 38a to 38c to the lighting state.

  Here, based on the fact that the long variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 stops the second representation symbol (in this example, at timing T13 shown in FIG. 53). 333) is displayed as a temporary stop (see FIG. 59 (13)). At this time, in response to the execution of the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 based on the long opening pattern, the opening notification LED 36 is lit in blue.

  Next, the CPU 120 for effect control stops and displays (determination stop) the stop symbol (33 3 in this example) of the second effect symbol at the timing of T13a shown in FIG. 53 when the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped. In addition, the game state is shifted from the high base state to the low base state at the timing when the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game state per special figure. Here, it is assumed that seven game balls fired in the right game area have won at a normal winning opening that is long open at the timing of T14 (see FIG. 59 (14)). At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control adds 70 to the value of the advantageous section prize ball counter in response to the reception (seven times) of the ordinary electric accessory winning designation command (command C600H) and the updated value ( In this example, 120) is displayed on the ball number notification LED 39. Further, the effect control CPU 120 gives the effect display device 5 the number of prize balls paid out during the long open period (“+70” in this example) and the value of the updated advantageous section prize ball number counter (this book). In the example, “total120”) is displayed. In this way, it is possible to cumulatively count the number of advantageous section prize balls as the advantageous section continues.

  Next, at the timing shown in T14a of FIG. 53, it is assumed that the long opening period of the normal winning opening ends and the ordinary power is closed. Accordingly, the effect control CPU 120 switches the open notification LED 36 from the lighting state to the extinguishing state. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 changes the gaming state from the low base state at the timing of T14b in FIG. Transition to the high base state and continue the advantageous section. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 determines the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter (120 in this example) as the ball according to the continued advantageous section (does not fall into the first gaming state (low probability low base)). It is continuously displayed on the LED 39 for number notification and the effect display device 5.

  Next, since the fifth gaming state has continued, the player continues to play the right-handed game, and at the timing of T15 shown in FIG. 54, the game ball launched into the right gaming area passes through the passing gate 41 and almost simultaneously. It is assumed that it has passed the second start winning opening. Here, at the timing of T15, since the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the normal symbol normal process and the variable waiting timer has timed out, the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. The normal symbol variation display is started (that is, the passage becomes effective). In addition, at the timing of T15, the value of the special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process and the first special symbol holding memory number is 0, so that the game ball to the second start winning opening is Based on the approach, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, the approach becomes valid). In this case, the special symbol type is a non-probable variation E special symbol (low probability low base fall), and the special symbol variation pattern is a variation pattern other than that for the open-circuit use (that is, in FIG. 49). It is assumed that (F) defeat effect (pattern) is selected through the effect development shown in (D).

  At this time, the change display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 and the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B are started almost at the same time. An effect that suggests whether the fifth gaming state is maintained, promoted to the fourth gaming state, or falls to the first gaming state when the variation pattern (TPB5-1 to TPB5-1 to TPB5) is not for electric release Is executed (see FIG. 59 (15)).

  In addition, in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 has passed the passing gate 41 and entered the second start winning opening within the predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds) (predetermined). Based on the fact that the start condition of the normal symbol variation display and the special symbol variation display start condition are satisfied within the period), as described above, the passage effect LEDs 38a to 38c are located above the passage gate 41. The passing effect LEDs 38a and 38b are both switched from the lit state to the unlit state, and the passing effect LED 38c between the pass gate 41 and the second ordinary winning ball device 6B is switched from the lit state to the blinking state. .

  Next, the CPU 120 for effect control is at the timing of T15a in FIG. 54 when a predetermined time (400 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the LED LEDs for passing effects 38a and 38b are turned off and the LED for effecting passage 38c is switched to the blinking state. Then, re-lighting control is performed to return all of the passage-time effect LEDs 38a to 38c to the lighting state.

  Here, at the timing of T15 described above, the variation display of the normal symbol is started together with the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is a variation pattern (TPB5-1 to TPB5-1 to 3) other than that for the public power release. (In both cases, the special figure variation time is 20 seconds), so there is a period during which the normal winning opening is long open before the timing of T16 which is controlled to the gaming state per special figure (the long period shown in FIG. 54). Open period X). As described above, the performance control CPU 120 switches the open notification LED 36 from the unlit state to the blue lit state at the timing when the long opening of the normal winning opening is started, and the second opening winning opening during the long opening. When a game ball enters, the release notification LED 36 is switched from a blue lighting state to a red lighting state. The effect control CPU 120 also updates the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter (+10 per entry) even when a game ball enters the normal winning opening during the long opening (long opening period X). The updated value can be displayed on the ball number notification LED 39. In this case, in the effect display device 5, an effect corresponding to the fact that the variation pattern of the special symbol is a variation pattern (TPB 5-1 to 3) other than the one for opening the ordinary power transmission is executed. 5 may not display the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even after the long opening period X has elapsed, the high base state continues during the period in which the special symbol variation display (TPB5-1 to 3) started at T15 is executed. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol variation display is executed, and the normal winning opening may be opened long before the timing of T16. The effect control CPU 120 can update the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter and display the updated value on the ball number notification LED 39 even when a game ball enters the normal winning opening during the long opening. Is possible.

  Then, when the variation display result of the special symbol is for the special symbol of the non-probability variation E, the effect control CPU 120 battles at the timing of T16 when the gaming state per special symbol is started (transition to the low base state). The defeat effect which displays the effect image which seems to be defeated is performed (refer FIG. 60 (16)).

  Here, because of the occurrence of a special figure hit, the gaming control microcomputer 100 sends a special prize opening opening designation command (command A1XXH), a special prize opening opening designation command (command A1XXH), in addition to a special figure start designation command ( Command A2XXH) and an end designation command (command A3XXH) per special figure are transmitted, and effects (fanfare effect, round effect, ending effect) according to each command can be executed. However, in the example of FIGS. 54 and 60 (16), the effect control CPU 120 executes the defeat effect over the period from the start to the end of the gaming state per special figure in response to the reception of the special designation start command. Even if the special winning opening opening designation command, the special winning opening opening designation command, and the special designation end designation command are received, the defeat effect is continued without interruption. That is, the rush entry effect of this embodiment is an effect including effects equivalent to a fanfare effect, a round effect, and an ending effect, and the effect control CPU 120, for example, at the timing of T16a shown in FIG. Assume that a hit end designation command has been received.

  Next, the gaming state per special figure ends at the timing of T17 shown in FIG. 54, and the gaming state is controlled in accordance with the low base state (low probability low base state in this example) after the gaming state per special figure is finished. It is assumed that a right-handed lighting end designation command (command 9C00H) is transmitted from the control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. Receiving the right-handed lighting end designation command, the effect control CPU 120 switches the right-handed notification LED 37 from the lighting state to the extinguishing state (see FIG. 60 (17)).

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 fires a game ball toward the left game area in response to switching the right-handed notification LED 37 from the lit state to the unlit state (receiving a right-handed lighting end designation command). An image that prompts the user to display (for example, an image of a character “Return to left-handed!”) On the effect display device 5 or a sound that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the left game area (for example, “Return to left-handed!”). For the purpose of promoting left-handedness, which is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a gate passage designation command or receives a second start opening prize designation command when the right-handed notification LED 37 is in an extinguished state, that is, in a period in which a left-handed game should be performed. When a command that can specify that the player is playing a right-handed game is received, the notification for promoting the left-handed is executed.

  As with the right-handed notification LED 37, a left-handed notification LED is provided for prompting the player to launch a game ball toward the left game area, and the left-handed notification LED is turned on. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a firing promotion notification is made to urge a game ball to be launched into the left game area. In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the effect control CPU 120 switches the left-handed notification LED from the lit state to the unlit state in response to receiving the right-handed lighting start designation command, and issues a right-handed lighting end designation command. The left-handed notification LED may be switched from the unlit state to the lit state in response to the reception. In addition, a dedicated command for controlling turning on / off of the left-handed notification LED may be provided, and the effect control CPU 120 sets a left-handed lighting start designation command (for example, a right-handed lighting end designation command). The left-handed notification LED is switched from the unlit state to the lit state, and a left-handed lighting end designation command (for example, transmitted as a set with a right-handed lighting start designation command) is received. The left-handed notification LED may be switched from the lit state to the unlit state in response to reception.

  In addition, the production control CPU 120 stops updating the advantageous section prize ball number counter in response to the reception of the right-handed lighting end designation command (end of counting), and thereafter receives the ordinary electric accessory prize designation command. However, the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter is not increased. Then, the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter (120 in this example) when the right-handed lighting end designation command is received is displayed on the effect display device 5 and the ball number notification LED 39 for a predetermined period (T17 to T18 shown in FIG. 54). Period). At this time, the effect display device 5 also displays information that allows the player to recognize that the advantageous section has ended (“rush end” in this example).

  The effect control CPU 120 changes the lighting color of the frame LED 9 from red to yellow according to the fact that the gaming state is not the gaming state per special figure and is in the low base state, and the passing effect LEDs 38a to 38c. Switch from on to off. The player knows that the right-handed game should be ended by the change in the light emission mode of these effect LEDs.

  In this way, the number of balls to be paid out is cumulatively accumulated during the period in which the right-handed notification LED 37 is lit, that is, the period in which the effect for promoting right-handedness is being executed. By displaying the number of balls as the number of advantageous section prize balls acquired by the player in the advantageous section on the effect display device 5 or the number-of-balls notification LED 39, the gaming machine that performs the right-handed promotion notification appropriately calculates the game value. And the total result can be presented to the player.

  In the present embodiment, a right-handed lighting start designation command (command 9C01H) and a right-handed lighting end designation command (command 9C00H) are provided as dedicated commands for controlling the lighting and extinction of the right-handed notification LED. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can appropriately count the number of prize balls given to the player during the advantageous section (right-handed promotion period) based on the reception of these dedicated commands.

  Further, in this embodiment, in response to the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command (command 9C01H), which is a dedicated command for controlling the lighting of the right-handed notification LED, the counting of the number of advantageous section winning balls is started, In response to the reception of a right-handed lighting end designation command (command 9C00H), which is a dedicated command for controlling the right-handed notification LED to be turned off, the total number of advantageous section award balls is terminated and the totaled result is displayed. For this reason, the total period can be easily specified in the effect control CPU 120.

  In addition, as in this embodiment, when trying to count the number of advantageous section prize balls without using a command or the like for turning on / off the right-handed notification LED 37, the advantageous section after the game state per special figure is finished. It is necessary to specify on the side of the effect control CPU 120 whether or not to continue or shift to the first gaming state. For example, when the game state designation command is a command for designating a background image corresponding to the game state displayed on the effect display device 5 every time the special symbol variation display is executed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the special symbol. It is possible to grasp the gaming state at the start of the variable display, but when the advantageous section ends and the first gaming state (low probability low base state) is entered, the first start prize in the first gaming state Until the game ball enters the mouth and the change display of the first special symbol is started, the production control CPU 120 cannot grasp that it has shifted to the first game state, and continues to count the number of advantageous section prize balls. End up. Further, even if the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a command for designating the type per special figure according to the occurrence per special figure, the variation display result becomes “per special figure” as in this embodiment. In a game machine in which the high base state ends and the low base state shifts to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times in the fourth gaming state) without any change, the effect control CPU 120 In order to grasp the gaming state, it is necessary to grasp the number of times the special symbol is changed in each gaming state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp the gaming state using a command for controlling the device for promoting the right strike (right strike notification LED 37). It is possible to tabulate.

  In this example, the special control of the non-probability change E occurs in the fifth gaming state (high probability high base state), so that the effect control CPU 120 receives the right-handed lighting end designation command (command 9C00H). Completion of the number of advantageous section prize balls has been ended, but if a special figure of non-probability variation F occurs in the fifth gaming state and the fourth gaming state is entered, the variation display result in the fourth gaming state is “ Even when the special display variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times in the fourth gaming state) without being “per special figure”, the effect control CPU 120 similarly performs a right-handed lighting end designation command (command 9C00H) is received and the counting of the number of advantageous section prize balls is ended.

  In the present embodiment, in response to the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received the normal electric accessory winning designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when the game ball enters the normal winning opening in the advantageous section. In this example, the number of winning balls corresponding to the normal winning opening (in this example, 10) is added to the value of the advantageous section winning ball number counter (the number of balls displayed on the ball number notification LED 39 changes accordingly) However, the number of prize balls given in accordance with the entry of a game ball into another winning slot in the advantageous section may be added to the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter. For example, in response to receiving a second start opening winning designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when a game ball enters the second starting winning opening, a prize ball corresponding to the second start winning opening is received. The number may be added to the value of the advantageous section winning ball number counter, and when the game ball enters the big winning opening, the big winning opening winning designation command transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 100 is received. Accordingly, the number of prize balls corresponding to the special winning opening may be added to the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter. In addition, a general winning prize that is not constituted by a variable winning ball apparatus (does not correspond to a big winning opening or a normal winning opening), and a normal symbol variation display or a special symbol variation display is not executed when a game ball enters. When a game ball enters the mouth (the aforementioned first general winning opening, second general winning opening), the general winning opening winning designation command transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 100 is received. The number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening may be added to the value of the advantageous section winning ball number counter. In addition, the number of prize balls given in the advantageous section may be added to the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter regardless of the winning opening where the game ball has entered.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter on the effect display device 5 and the number-of-balls notification LED 39 for a certain period of time (T17 to T18). An image prompting the player to return to the game is displayed, and the seven segments of all the digits of the ball number notification LED 39 are turned off (see FIG. 60 (18)).

  Here, the effect control CPU 120 erases the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter (120 in this example) during the period in which the first gaming state (low probability low base state) is controlled after the advantageous section ends. Keep memorizing without any problems. Then, during the period in which the first gaming state (low probability low base state) is controlled after the advantageous section ends, the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter is not updated. Even if a game ball enters the winning slot (including the winning hole) and a prize ball is awarded, the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter is not updated, and the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter is the number of balls. It is not displayed on the LED 39 for notification. The effect control CPU 120 shifts from the first gaming state (low probability low base state) after the advantageous section ends to a gaming state (second gaming state or third gaming state) other than the advantageous section, that is, the probability change. When a special figure of A or non-probability change B occurs, the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter is deleted (reset to 0).

  Next, after the gaming state transitions to the first gaming state (low probability low base state), the first start is performed at the timing shown in T19 of FIG. 54 without transitioning to either the second gaming state or the third gaming state. It is assumed that the change display of the first special symbol is started based on the game ball entering the winning opening (see FIG. 61 (19)).

  Next, at the timing of T20, as the specific special symbol (the symbol per special symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol which is the variation display result of the first special symbol, the effect display device 5 displays the uniform symbols. A stop symbol (for example, 777) of the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 61 (20)). Here, it is assumed that the type per generated special map is probability variation B. At this time, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5, a frame is displayed in accordance with the fact that the same effect symbols are aligned. While the lighting color of the LED 9 changes from yellow to blue, all of the passage-time effect LEDs 38a, 38b, and 38c are switched from the unlit state to the lit state.

  When the symbol per special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A, the gaming state per special symbol is started at a timing T21 when a predetermined symbol fixed stop period has elapsed. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a start-per-spec command (command A0XXH) and a right-handed lighting start specification command (command 9C01H) with the start of the game state per special figure. The CPU 120 for effect control shifts to the fifth gaming state in response to receiving the start designation command (command A0XXH) per special figure and the type per special figure generated is the probability variation B. A rush rush effect for informing this is executed (see FIG. 61 (21)).

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 switches the right-handed notification LED 37 from the unlit state to the lit state in response to receiving the right-handed lighting start designation command (command 9C01H). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has received a right-handed lighting start designation command (command 9C01H) and a special figure of probability variation B that shifts to an advantageous section (fourth game state or fifth game state) has occurred. Accordingly, the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter (120 in this example) stored in the RAM 122 is displayed on the ball number notification LED 39 (that is, 0 in the 7th segment in the first digit and the second and second digits). (2 is turned on for 7 segments, and 1 is turned on for 7 segments in the third digit), and at the same time, updating of the advantageous section award ball counter that has been once stopped is resumed (summation restart).

  In this way, when the first game state (low probability low base state) is controlled at the end of the advantageous section, the special figure of the special figure type (probability variation B) that shifts to the advantageous section again in the first gaming state. When a win occurs, the effect control CPU 120 again uses the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter (120 in this example) that has been retained without being erased when the game state is shifted to the first gaming state. It can be displayed on the LED 39 for notification. Then, when the fifth gaming state (highly accurate high base state) is controlled after the gaming state per special figure is finished, counting is restarted from the value of the advantageous section prize ball counter at that time (120 in this example). Is possible.

  Temporarily, in the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous section, there is a special figure per type of special figure (probability variation A) that shifts to the second gaming state or a special figure type (non-probability variation B) that shifts to the third gaming state. If it occurs, since the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter is cleared to 0 as described above, even if it subsequently shifts to the advantageous section again through the second gaming state or the third gaming state, at that time The value displayed on the ball number notification LED 39 is zero.

  As described above, even after the advantageous section is ended and the first gaming state is reached, it is possible to retain the number of advantageous section prize balls counted in the advantageous section. When the first gaming state shifts to the advantageous section again, the counting can be resumed from the number of advantageous section prize balls held. Therefore, in the first gaming state, the player will continue to play a game to generate a special figure per type of special figure (probability variation B) to be transferred to the advantageous zone again, and the advantageous zone has ended. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the period from the reception of the right-handed lighting end designation command (for example, the timing of T17) to the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command (for example, to the timing of T21) from the first gaming state. The effect control CPU 120 does not update the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 122, and does not display the value of the advantageous section prize ball number counter on the effect display device 5 or the ball number notification LED 39. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and after receiving the right-handed lighting end designation command (T17), the value of the advantageous section winning ball number counter stored in the RAM 122 is set to each winning opening including the normal winning opening. The updated advantageous section prize ball number counter value is not displayed on the effect display device 5 or the ball number notification LED 39 (after the update). Not reflected the counter value to the display) as may be. When a right-handed lighting start designation command is received (T21), the updated advantageous section prize ball number counter value is displayed on the effect display device 5 or the ball number notification LED 39 (the updated counter value is changed). (It may be reflected in the display).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 52 to 61, the game control microcomputer 100 outputs a right-handed lighting start designation command due to occurrence of a special figure of probability variation B in the first gaming state, and is advantageous thereafter. The game control microcomputer 100 outputs a right-handed lighting end designation command when a special figure of non-probability change E occurs in the advantageous section (fifth gaming state) under the control of the section (fifth gaming state). In relation to the example, the number of prize balls given during the period from when the production control CPU 120 receives the right-handed lighting start designation command until it receives the right-handed lighting end designation command is calculated as the number of advantageous section prize balls. And explained. However, in this embodiment, when a special figure of non-probability change B occurs in the low base state, the third game state (chance zone), which is the low probability high base state once in a short time, is transferred to the third game. When a special figure of non-probability change C or probability change C occurs in the state, it shifts to an advantageous section (the fourth game state or the fifth game state). At this time, since the game control microcomputer 100 outputs a right-handed lighting start designation command at the timing when the game state is controlled to the non-probability B special figure, the effect control CPU 120 performs the game per non-probability B special game. The total value of the number of prize balls from the time when the state is controlled to the transition to the advantageous section and the number of prize balls after the transition to the advantageous section is added up. In this case, the production control CP 120 determines that the sum value (that is, the “game state per special figure that shifts to the high base state” generated in the low base state starts from the start of the “special state that shifts to the low base state”. The number of prize balls given during the period until the end of the “game state per special figure” may be displayed on the effect display device 5 or the ball number notification LED 39. Only the number of prize balls may be displayed on the effect display device 5 or the ball number notification LED 39.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the right-handed lighting start designation command at the timing of starting the gaming state per special figure (timing for transmitting the start designation command per special figure) has been described. However, it is not limited to this timing, and during the period during which it is controlled to the gaming state per special figure (for example, at the timing of transmitting the designation command during the opening of the big prize opening or at the timing of sending the designation command after opening the big prize opening) A right-handed lighting start designation command may be sent, or a right-handed lighting start designation command may be sent at the timing of sending a special-designated end designation command. A right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted at (timing when the end effect per special figure ends on the effect control board side) And it may be.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 performs the right-handed lighting end designation command at the timing when the gaming state per special figure of the uncertain change E ends (timing at which the special presentation end effect ends on the effect control board side). However, not only at this timing, but a right-handed lighting end designation command is transmitted at the timing of starting the gaming state per special figure of non-probability change E (timing at which a special designation start designation command is transmitted). It is also possible to do this, for example during the period when the game state is controlled to the special state of the non-probability change E (for example, the timing for transmitting the designation command during opening of the big prize opening or the timing for sending the designation command after opening the big prize opening In other words, a right-handed lighting end designation command may be transmitted. It is also possible to send a specified command.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which dedicated effect control commands (a right-handed lighting start designation command and a right-handed lighting end designation command) for controlling lighting / extinction of the right-handed notification LED 37 has been described. The present invention is not limited to such a mode in which the dedicated command is provided, and lighting / extinguishing of the right-handed notification LED 37 may be controlled based on reception of another command. For example, the production control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed notification LED 37 in response to receiving a start specification command per probability variation B or non-probability variation B special figure. The right-handed notification LED 37 may be turned off in response to receiving the end designation command per special figure when controlled to the gaming state.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the effect device that promotes right-handedness is the right-handed notification LED 37 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this example. It may be a movable accessory that can be transformed from the first form to the second form and from the second form to the first form by controlling the motor in accordance with the production control command. In the first form, when a right-handed game is promoted, the movable accessory may change from the first form to the second form. Further, the effect device that promotes the right-handed movement is movable, for example, movable from the first position to the second position and from the second position to the first position by controlling the motor in accordance with the effect control command from the game control microcomputer. It may be an accessory, and when a left-handed game is encouraged, the movable accessory is in the first position, and when a right-handed game is encouraged, the movable accessory moves from the first position to the second position. There may be.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It is.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although CPU120 for production | presentation control illustrated the form which starts the variation display of a 2nd production symbol based on the start of the variation display of a special symbol, this invention is limited to this. Instead, the display of the variation of the second effect may be started based on the start of the display of the variation of the normal symbol.

  Moreover, in the said Example, CPU120 for production | presentation control illustrated the form which ends the variation display of a 2nd production symbol based on the completion | finish of the variation display of a special symbol, However, This invention is limited to this. Instead, the change display of the second effect symbol may be ended based on the end of the change display of the normal symbol.

  In the embodiment, when the release control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is executed based on the short opening pattern in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the second effect symbol with the irregular symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second effect symbol is a uniform symbol derived when the opening control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is executed based on the long opening pattern. May be stopped and displayed with different matching symbols. In this case, for example, when the opening control of the normally variable winning ball device 27 is executed based on the long opening pattern, the second symbol is set to an odd number of symbols, and the normal variable winning ball device 27 is opened based on the short opening pattern. When control is executed, the second symbol may be an even-numbered symbol, or the symbol type and display mode of the stop display may be different between short open and long open.

  Further, in the embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control stops the second effect symbol depending on whether or not the special symbol variation pattern is a variation pattern for normal electric long opening in S826 in the second symbol variation start process of S801. Although the form which determines whether a design is made into a uniform design or an irregular design was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, For example, when stopping and displaying a 2nd production design, it is based on a long open pattern The stop symbol type of the second effect symbol may be determined depending on whether or not the opening control of the normal variable winning ball device 27 is executed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the release control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is executed based on the long release pattern in the high base state, the change display of the normal symbol is finished before the change display of the special symbol is ended. In this case, the second effect symbols are displayed in a temporary stop display with the second effect symbols until the special symbol variation display ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the regular symbol variation display is terminated. The second effect symbol may be variably displayed at the time without displaying the temporary stop.

  In the embodiment, in the low base state, the variation display of the first effect symbol is executed in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern is used as the special symbol variation pattern in the fifth gaming state. In the case where the variation pattern for opening is selected, the variation display of the second effect symbol is executed according to the variation display of the second special symbol and the normal symbol. However, the present invention is limited to this. Instead of the above, the variable display of the second effect symbol may be executed even in a high base state such as the third gaming state or the fourth gaming state. In addition to the change display of the second effect symbol, the change display (for example, reduced display) of the first effect symbol may be executed in response to the change display of the second special symbol.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the normal symbol has a probability of being 250/250 in the high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal symbol is not in the high base state. You may make it be out of the normal figure with a lower probability than winning. In addition, when the variable display of the second effect symbol is executed in the case where the normal drawing is off, the release control of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is not executed, and therefore the irregular (out of) symbols are stopped as the display result of the second effect symbol. It is preferable to display.

  Further, in the embodiment, as the normal symbol variation pattern, only the variation pattern having the same variation display time is prepared for each of the regular pattern variation pattern and the out-of-range variation pattern, and the variation of the normal symbol is the variation pattern of the special symbol. Ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 27 depending on whether it is determined to be a fluctuation pattern for ordinary electric short opening whose fluctuation display time is shorter than the pattern or a fluctuation pattern for long opening whose fluctuation display time is longer than the fluctuation pattern of normal symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the variation pattern having the same variation display time is prepared as the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is prepared. Fluctuation patterns for the open-circuit short circuit, whose fluctuation display time is shorter than that of special symbols, and special symbols Depending variation display time than the pattern is determined in any of a variation pattern of long Hiroshi electrostatic Long-open, the execution period of the opening control of the common variable winning ball device 27 may be determined.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is per common figure in the high base state, depending on whether or not the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is finished, The mode for determining whether the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 is controlled to be opened based on either the short opening pattern or the long opening pattern has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the display is in the low base state when the display is finished, the release control may be executed based on one of a plurality of types of short release patterns having different release periods, or the normal symbol variation display is finished. In the case of a high base state at the time, release control is executed based on one of multiple types of long release patterns with different release periods. It may be.

  Also, when preparing multiple types of release patterns with different release periods as short release patterns and long release patterns in this way, for example, there is a difference between the end point of the normal symbol variation display and the special symbol variation display end point. The opening period may be different depending on the period.

  In the above embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set in S155 in the normal symbol stop process of S103. The second electric accessory operating time is set (S156b), and when it is not set, the first electric accessory operating time for opening the short is set as being in the low base state (S156a). The invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the special symbol variation display is in progress or the game state per special symbol when the normal symbol hit flag is set in S154 in the normal symbol stop process of S103 No, by determining the special symbol variation pattern (variable display time), etc., the second electric accessory operating time for long open and short open It may be determined whether to set either of the first electric won game operation time of use.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the special game is generated in the high base state and the game state is controlled to the special game state, the CPU 103 controls the low base state during the period in which the special game is controlled to the special game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the high base state, when a small hit different from the special figure occurs and the small hit gaming state is controlled, the small hit gaming state is controlled. During a certain period, it may be controlled to a low base state.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the state in which the game ball passed the passage gate 41, but the state which does not receive the 2nd start winning is generated 5 times which is a predetermined number of times, it illustrated the form which is determined to be abnormal, The number of times is not limited to this, and the predetermined number can be set to other than five.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the game ball passed the passage gate 41, but illustrated the form which determines as abnormal when the state which does not receive the 2nd start winning a prize continuously occurs a predetermined number of times, this invention is limited to this. For example, the abnormality may be determined based on occurrence of a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period even if the abnormal state does not continue for a predetermined number of times. Specifically, an abnormal state has occurred a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) within a predetermined time (for example, two minutes), or a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) of game balls are passed through the passage gate 41 or An abnormality may be determined based on the occurrence of an abnormal state a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) while entering the second start winning opening.

  In the above embodiment, three different gaming states (third gaming state, fourth gaming state, and fifth gaming state) are exemplified as the high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this. There may be only one gaming state as the high base state, or four or more gaming states.

  Moreover, although the said Example illustrated the form which displays a different kind of effect design (For example, the 2nd effect design which consists of Chinese numerals, and the 1st effect design which consists of Arabic numerals) in a high base state and a low base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the presentation control combination determination processing method differs at least when the production control CPU 120 is in the high base state and the low base state (for example, In the low base state, the combination of effect symbols according to the display result of the special symbol is determined as the variation display result of the effect symbol, while in the high base state, the variation display state of the normal symbol is changed as the effect symbol variation display result. If it is possible to derive and display a mode based on the variable symbol display state, a common effect symbol may be displayed in the high base state and the low base state.

  In the above embodiment, as an example of the normal variable device, a mode in which the normal variable winning ball device 27 that can open and close the normal winning opening for giving a game ball (prize ball) according to the winning is applied. The invention is not limited to this, and as another example of a normally variable device, as a special start region in which a special start condition (for example, a second special start condition) can be established based on the entry of a game ball A variable winning ball apparatus capable of opening and closing the starting winning opening (for example, the second starting winning opening) may be applied.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of gaming balls are inside the gaming machine. The number of loaned balls that are enclosed in a circulating manner and lent in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls that are awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines that are stored in the memory. In these enclosed game machines, not the game ball but points and points are given to the player, so these points and points assigned correspond to the game value.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which made the special symbol two types, the 1st special figure and the 2nd special figure, is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, A special symbol is 1 or 3 It is good also as above.

  The state advantageous to the player means a specific game state (per special figure, etc.) advantageous for the player who can acquire a lot of game media, and a plurality of types of specific game states with different expected values of the game media that can be acquired. (Such as per special figure with a different number of rounds), a high base state where conditions for paying out the winning ball are more easily established than in the normal gaming state, a special reach state (for example, super reach, etc.), and the fluctuation pattern per special figure A state that is a variation pattern based on the variation pattern is included.

[Management device]
Next, a management apparatus 1000 capable of collecting the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an outline of a game system S including each pachinko gaming machine 1 installed in the game hall and a management device 1000 that counts game information of each pachinko gaming machine 1. Each pachinko gaming machine 1 is connected to the management device 1000 via a relay device such as a HUB and a communication cable, and various signals output from each pachinko gaming machine 1 are input to the management device 1000. In the management apparatus 1000, game information of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be tabulated.

  FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the management apparatus 1000. The management apparatus 1000 used in the present embodiment has a data bus 1001 that transmits and receives data inside a computer as a central processing unit (CPU) 1002 that performs various processes performed by the management apparatus 1000, a work memory, and the like. RAM 1003 used, real-time clock (RTC) 1004 for outputting time information and calendar information, a storage device 1005 such as a hard disk, an input device 1006 such as a keyboard and a mouse, a display device 1007 for displaying and outputting various screens, and various information Connected to a printer 1008 that prints out a signal, a pachinko gaming machine 1 connected to a local area network (LAN), and a communication unit 1009 to which a signal output from a counter provided corresponding to each pachinko gaming machine 1 is input Is a normal computer.

  The storage device 1005 includes a game data table (for managing game data of each pachinko gaming machine 1) in addition to a totaling program in which processing contents for performing various types of totaling processing executed in the management device 1005 are described. 66) is stored.

  The communication unit 1009 includes an overall safe signal, a right area safe signal, a special signal, a special signal, and an advantageous state signal output from each pachinko gaming machine 1, and an out ball count corresponding to each pachinko gaming machine 1. Each signal of the out signal output from the device is input via the relay device. The CPU 1002 can identify the gaming state of each pachinko gaming machine 1 and count game information by detecting the output state (also referred to as ON state) and non-output state (also referred to as OFF state) of each signal. It is possible.

(Safe signal)
The total safe signal and the right area safe signal indicate the number of winning balls (safe number) paid out based on the winning of a game ball in a winning opening to which a predetermined number of winning balls are awarded according to winning. A gaming device (for example, a card unit or a call lamp device) provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a management device (for example, a management device 1000) installed in a game hall such as a hall computer The output signal for enabling identification on the external device side.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first general winning opening, second general winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening, etc.) When a game ball is won and the number of award balls corresponding to each winning hole is paid out from the ball payout device by the control of the payout control board, an overall safe signal is mainly displayed every time 10 award balls are paid out. Input to the substrate 11. The entire safe signal input to the main board 11 is output to the outside via the information terminal board 91.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 64, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game balls launched into the left game area cannot be won or are difficult to win, and each of the winning holes (the first game holes that can be won by the game balls launched into the right game area) When a game ball wins a prize at the 2 start winning opening, the second general winning opening, and a normal winning opening), the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning opening is paid out from the ball payout device by the control of the payout control board. A right area safe signal is input to the main board 11 every time ten prize balls are paid out. The right area safe signal input to the main board 11 is output to the outside via the information terminal board 91.

  As described above, the first ordinary winning ball device 6A and the second ordinary winning ball device 6B, the first general winning ball device 28 and the second general winning ball device 29, the ordinary variable winning ball device 27 and the special variable winning ball device. For all entry areas to which prize balls are awarded, an overall safe signal is output to enable the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls to each entry area to be specified. . On the other hand, only the game balls launched into the right game area, such as the second ordinary winning ball device 6B, the second general winning ball device 29, and the ordinary variable winning ball device 27, enter the entry area to which a prize ball is given. A right area safe signal for enabling the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the entry of a game ball to each entry area is output for an entry area that is possible or easy to enter. For example, the whole safe signal and the right region safe signal are pulse signals having a predetermined width.

  In the low base state before the timing of X shown in FIG. 64, since the player launches a game ball toward the left game area, an overall safe signal may be output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, Does not output the right area safe signal. If the CPU 1002 of the management apparatus 1000 confirms that the right area safe signal has been input exceeding a certain frequency (for example, three times per minute) in the low base state, the player plays the left-handed game. The administrator may display a predetermined warning message on the display device 1007 because there is a possibility that the player has accidentally played the right-handed game or that there is a possibility of some fraud in the right game area. You may make it notify abnormality. For example, as a warning message, together with the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the content of the abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 of that machine number (in this example, the winning in the winning area of the right gaming area was confirmed in the low base state) ) Should be displayed.

  Further, in the high base state after the timing of X shown in FIG. 64, since the player launches a game ball toward the right game area, both the overall safe signal and the right area safe signal are output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is output. In addition, since the normal power may be released long in the high base state, the frequency of outputting the overall safe signal and the right region safe signal is usually higher than in the low base state. If the CPU 1002 of the management apparatus 1000 confirms that the entire safe signal is input but the right area safe signal is not input in the high base state, the player should mistakenly turn left where he should play a right-handed game. Since there is a possibility of playing a game, a predetermined warning message may be displayed on the display device 1007 to notify the administrator of the abnormality.

  The overall safe signal is a signal based on winnings in all winning areas, and the right area safe signal is a signal based on winnings in some winning areas. Therefore, as shown in FIG. For example, the output frequency of the right area safe signal does not exceed the input frequency of the entire safe signal. If the CPU 1002 of the management apparatus 1000 confirms that the frequency at which the right area safe signal is input is higher than the frequency at which the overall safe signal is input, the signal line is incorrect or the signal Since there is a possibility that there is a failure in transmission or the recognition (setting) of the signal line on the management device 1000 side is incorrect, a predetermined warning message is displayed on the display device 1007 to the administrator. Notification may be performed.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can output the right area safe signal based on the winning of the game ball in the winning area provided in the right game area, separately from the overall safe signal, so that the management device 1000 The number of winning balls (for example, the right area safe number in FIG. 66) paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the winning area provided in the right gaming area is counted by an external device such as Notification processing or the like can be performed.

(Out signal)
The out signal indicates the number of game media (out number) used in the game by being fired in the game area, and a gaming device (for example, a card unit or a game machine provided in one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko gaming machine 1). This is an output signal that can be specified on the external device side such as a call lamp device) or a management device (for example, the management device 1000) installed in a game hall such as a hall computer.

  Below the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided an out ball counter (not shown) that counts the game balls (out balls) used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1. It has been. A game ball that has not won any winning opening is taken into an out opening 26 provided at the bottom of the gaming area. The out ball that has entered the out port 26 flows down the out ball flow path, and is counted by an out ball counter provided in the middle of the out ball flow path. In addition, the game balls won in any winning opening flow down the out ball flow path and are counted as out balls by the out ball counter. Therefore, it is possible to count the number of game media that have been driven into the game area (used for games) by the out ball counter. Each time 10 out balls are counted, an out signal is output from the out ball counter. The out signal is a pulse signal having a predetermined width, and the out ball counter provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can output the out signal. The number of outs per one can be tabulated.

(Signals per special figure)
The gaming control microcomputer 100 turns on the signal per special figure during the period during which the game state is controlled per special figure, and turns off the signal per special figure during the period when the game state is not controlled per special figure. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not each pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the gaming state per special drawing by an external device such as the management device 1000. Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 100 stops displaying symbols per special figure as a special figure display result, and then transmits a start designation command per special figure (that is, a fanfare effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1). After the opening / closing control of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is finished, an end designation command per special figure is transmitted, and the end effect (ending effect) per special figure corresponding to the end designation command per special figure is finished. The signal per special figure is turned on during the period until the signal is made, and the signal per special figure is turned off during the other periods. Note that the signal per special figure is in an output state during the period in which the game state per special figure is controlled, regardless of the gaming state when the symbol per special figure is stopped and displayed.

  For example, in the examples of FIGS. 31A and 31B, the signal per special figure is turned ON at the timing when the gaming state changes from the high base state to the low base state with the start of the gaming state per special figure. At the timing when the gaming state changes from the low base state to the high base state with the end of the hit gaming state, the special figure hit signal is turned OFF. In the example of the general electric short circuit opening shown in FIG. 31A, the signal per special figure is turned ON for a period corresponding to 1136 ms (732 ms + 404 ms) per special figure, and the general electric long open state shown in FIG. In the example, the signal per special figure is ON for a period corresponding to 4876 ms (732 ms + 4144 ms) during the special figure.

(Special signal)
The gaming control microcomputer 100 is a period from the start of the gaming state per special figure for a specific special figure type until the next symbol per special figure is stopped and displayed, or the gaming state per the special figure ends. A special signal that is turned on is output for a period until (a probability variation E, a non-probability variation E), or a period until the off symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined number of times. The special signal in the present embodiment is a signal that can be output regardless of whether or not a game ball has entered the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, the special signal is turned ON at the start of the fanfare effect of probability variation B (when the start designation command per probability variation B special command is transmitted), and (1) the symbol per symbol of probability variation E Is specially displayed when either of the following conditions are satisfied: (2) The symbol per special symbol of non-probability change E is stopped and (3) The symbol per special symbol of non-probability variation F is stopped. Turn off the signal.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the probability change B, the game state is changed from the first game state (low probability low base state) or the second game state (high probability low base state) to the fifth game state (rush: high probability high base state). Type for each special figure to be changed to (state), and for the player, there is a possibility that the public train will be released for a long time (increased possibility). So-called first hit). When probability variation B occurs, the game state shifts to the fifth gaming state (rush: high-accuracy high-base state), and the types per special diagram that occur next are probability variation E, non-probability variation E, and non-probability variation F. Either. That is, the special signal is turned ON during the period from the start of the gaming state per special figure of probability variation B to the stop display of the symbol per special figure that occurs next.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the special signal is turned ON at the start of the fanfare production of non-probability variation B (when the start designation command per special diagram of non-probability variation B is transmitted), and (1) the symbol per special diagram of probability variation C is stopped and displayed. The special signal is turned OFF when any of the following conditions is satisfied: (2) the symbol per special symbol of non-probability change C is stopped and displayed, and (3) the off symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the non-probability change B, the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state (low probability low base state) or the second gaming state (high probability low base state) to the third gaming state (chance zone: low probability). Per special figure to be changed to (high base state), and for the player, there is a possibility that the public train will be released for a long time (the possibility is increased) per special figure that triggers the transition to an advantageous state Type (so-called first hit). When the non-probability change B occurs, the game state shifts to the third gaming state (chance zone: low probability high base state). Either a special symbol per hit type will be generated or the off symbol will be stopped and displayed.

  When a special figure per type of special figure of either probability variation C or non-probability variation C occurs, the gaming state after the gaming state per special figure remains in the high base state, but the off symbol is stopped and displayed Will return to the first gaming state (low probability low base state). In other words, there is no possibility that the ordinary power will be opened for a long time (the possibility decreases), and the state shifts to an unfavorable state. In this way, the period from the start of the game state per special figure of non-probability B to the stop display of the special figure per special figure that occurs next time, or the stop of the off symbol that triggers returning to the low base state During the period until display, the special signal is ON.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the special signal is turned ON at the start of the fanfare effect of probability variation C (when the start designation command per special diagram of probability variation C is transmitted), and (1) the symbol per special symbol of probability variation E is stopped and displayed. The special signal is turned OFF when any of the following conditions is satisfied: (2) The symbol per non-variable E special symbol is stopped and (3) The symbol per non-probable F special symbol is stopped. .

  As shown in FIG. 10, the probability change C is a type per special figure that changes the gaming state from the third gaming state (chance zone: low probability high base state) to the fifth gaming state (rush: high probability high base state). Yes, for the player, there is a possibility that the ordinary electric train will be opened for a long time (the possibility is increased). When the probability change C occurs, the game state shifts to the fifth gaming state (rush: high-accuracy high-base state), and the types per special figure to be generated next are probability variation E, non-probability variation E, and non-probability variation F. Either. That is, the special signal is turned on during the period from the start of the gaming state per special figure of probability variation C to the stop display of the symbol per special figure that occurs next.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the special signal is turned ON at the start of the fanfare production of non-probability variation C (when the start designation command per special diagram of non-probability variation C is transmitted), and (1) the symbol per special diagram of probability variation D is stopped Either (2) the symbol per special symbol of non-probability change D is stopped and displayed, and (3) the symbol per special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol is stopped and displayed 100 times continuously. When the above condition is satisfied, the special signal is turned OFF.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the non-probability change C is based on a special figure that changes the gaming state from the third gaming state (chance zone: low probability high base state) to the fourth gaming state (invincible zone: low probability high base state). It is a type, and for the player, there is a possibility that the public train will be opened for a long time (a possibility is increased), and it is a type per special figure (so-called villa). When non-probability change C occurs, the game state will change to the fourth game state (invincible zone: low-probability high-base state). Either the winning of the figure occurs or the off symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When a special figure per type of special figure of either probability variation C or non-probability variation C occurs, the gaming state after the gaming state per special figure remains in the high base state, and a special figure occurrence occurs. As a result, the high base state is maintained until the special symbol display result is stopped and displayed 99 times. However, if the special figure variable display is executed 100 times without generating a special figure and all the special figure display results are out of the design, the game state is changed to the first gaming state (low probability low base state). Will return. In other words, there is no possibility that the ordinary power will be opened for a long time (the possibility decreases), and the state shifts to an unfavorable state. In this way, the period from the start of the game state per special figure of non-probability change C to the stop display of the special figure per special figure that occurs next time, or the stop of the off symbol that triggers the return to the low base state During the period until display, the special signal is ON.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the special signal is turned ON at the start of the fanfare effect of probability variation D (when the start designation command per special diagram of probability variation D is transmitted), and (1) the symbol per special symbol of probability variation E is stopped and displayed. The special signal is turned OFF when any of the following conditions is satisfied: (2) The symbol per non-variable E special symbol is stopped and (3) The symbol per non-probable F special symbol is stopped. .

  As shown in FIG. 10, the probability variation D is a type per special figure that changes the gaming state from the fourth gaming state (invincible zone: low probability high base state) to the fifth gaming state (rush: high probability high base state). Yes, for the player, there is a possibility that the ordinary electric train will be opened for a long time (the possibility is increased). When the probability variation D occurs, the game state shifts to the fifth gaming state (rush: high-accuracy high-base state). Either. That is, the special signal is turned on during the period from the start of the gaming state per special figure of the probability variation D to the stop display of the symbol per special figure that occurs next.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the special signal is turned ON at the start of the fanfare production of non-probability variation D (when the start designation command per special diagram of non-probability variation D is transmitted), and (1) the symbol per special diagram of probability variation D is stopped and displayed. Either (2) the symbol per special symbol of non-probability change D is stopped and displayed, and (3) the symbol per special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol is stopped and displayed 100 times continuously. When the above condition is satisfied, the special signal is turned OFF.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the non-probability change D is a type per special figure that maintains the gaming state in the fourth gaming state (invincible zone: low-probability high-base state). There is a possibility (per so-called villa) per special figure in which an advantageous state continues (possibly increased). When non-probability change D occurs, the fourth game state (invincible zone: low-probability high-base state) will continue, and as a result of the special figure variable display, the special per-special characteristic of either probabilistic D or non-probable change D Either the winning of the figure occurs or the off symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When a special figure per type of special figure of either probability variation D or non-probability variation D occurs, the gaming state after the gaming state per special figure remains in the high base state, and per special figure occurs. As a result, the high base state is maintained until the special symbol display result is stopped and displayed 99 times. However, if the special figure variable display is executed 100 times without generating a special figure and all the special figure display results are out of the design, the game state is changed to the first gaming state (low probability low base state). Will return. In other words, there is no possibility that the ordinary power will be opened for a long time (the possibility decreases), and the state shifts to an unfavorable state. In this way, the period from the start of the game state per special figure of non-probability change D to the stop display of the special figure per special figure that occurs next time, or the stop of the off symbol that triggers the return to the low base state During the period until display, the special signal is ON.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the special signal is turned ON at the start of the fanfare effect of the probability variation E (when the start designation command per special diagram of the probability variation E is transmitted), and the end of the ending effect of the probability variation E (the end designation command per special diagram). The special signal is turned OFF at the end of the special drawing end effect executed according to

  As shown in FIG. 10, the probability variation E is a type per special figure that maintains the gaming state in the fifth gaming state (rush: high-probability high-base state). This is a type per special figure (per so-called villa) in which an advantageous state in which there exists a sex (increased possibility) continues. When the probability change E occurs, the fifth gaming state (rush: high probability high base state) continues. That is, for the special figure type (probability change E) in which the highly accurate and high base state continues, the special signal is turned ON during the period from the start to the end of the gaming state per special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the special signal is turned ON at the start of the fanfare effect of the non-probability change E (when the start designation command per special figure of the non-probability change E is sent), and the end of the ending effect of the non-probability change E (per special drawing). The special signal is turned OFF at the end of the end effect per special figure executed in response to the end designation command.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the non-probability change E is a type per special figure that changes the gaming state from the fifth gaming state (rush: high probability high base state) to the first gaming state (low probability low base state), After the end of the game state per special figure, there is no possibility that the ordinary power will be released for a long time (the possibility decreases), and the state shifts to a non-advantageous state. That is, for the special figure type (non-probability variation E) that triggers the end of the high base state (ends the consecutive resort), the special signal is turned ON during the period from the start to the end of the gaming state per special figure. .

  As shown in FIG. 65, the special signal is turned ON at the start of the fanfare effect of non-probability variation F (when the start designation command per special diagram of non-probability variation F is transmitted), and (1) the symbol per special diagram of probability variation D is stopped and displayed. Either (2) the symbol per special symbol of non-probability change D is stopped and displayed, and (3) the symbol per special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol is stopped and displayed 100 times continuously. When the above condition is satisfied, the special signal is turned OFF.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the non-probability change F is a type per special figure that changes the game state from the fifth game state (rush: high-probability base state) to the fourth game state (invincible zone: low-probability base state). For the player, there is a possibility that the ordinary electric train will be released for a long time (the possibility is increased), and it is the type per special figure (per so-called villa) where the advantageous state continues. When the non-probability change F occurs, the game state is shifted to the fourth game state (invincible zone: low-accuracy high-base state). Either the winning of the figure occurs or the off symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When a special figure per type of special figure of either probability variation D or non-probability variation D occurs, the gaming state after the gaming state per special figure remains in the high base state, and per special figure occurs. As a result, the high base state is maintained until the special symbol display result is stopped and displayed 99 times. However, if the special figure variable display is executed 100 times without generating a special figure and all the special figure display results are out of the design, the game state is changed to the first gaming state (low probability low base state). Will return. In other words, there is no possibility that the ordinary power will be opened for a long time (the possibility decreases), and the state shifts to an unfavorable state. In this way, the period from the start of the gaming state per special figure of non-probability change F to the stop display of the special figure per special figure that occurs next time, or the stop of the off symbol that triggers the return to the low base state During the period until display, the special signal is ON.

  As explained above, with respect to any of the types per probability figure, probability variation B, non-accuracy variation B, probability variation C, non-accuracy variation C, probability variation D, non-accuracy variation D, probability variation E, non-accuracy variation E, and non-accuracy variation F The corresponding special signal output period includes a period in which one special figure big hit gaming state (the gaming state per special figure that triggered the output of the special signal) is controlled. That is, the period during which the special signal is in the output state includes the period controlled by the gaming state per special figure that triggered the output of the special signal, but the gaming state per other special figure. Therefore, the special signal is a signal corresponding to the gaming state per one special figure.

  Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 does not enter the second start winning opening and does not flow out of the second starting winning opening or pass through the passing gate 41. The probability that a game ball enters the second start winning opening is extremely low (for example, about 1 in 1000 balls). Therefore, the period during which the special signal is output (one period in the ON state) includes a period during which the special state is controlled per one special figure corresponding to the special signal. There is a very high possibility that one or a plurality of public power release periods accompanying the occurrence of the gaming state per figure are included.

  For example, in the third game state (chance zone: low probability base), a variation pattern with a special diagram variation time of 60000 ms is selected regardless of the special diagram display result. There is a high possibility that two or more public power releases will be executed outside the period per figure. In this case, one special signal period corresponding to the special signal is included in the output period of the special signal, and two or more public power open periods are included.

  In the fourth gaming state (invincible zone: low probability base), the rate at which the off symbol is stopped and displayed is high (86/100). The high base state is maintained until the symbols that are out of 100 consecutively are stopped and displayed without stopping the symbols per special symbol (without triggering the transition to the low base state). For this reason, it is highly likely that the public power release is continuously executed while the off-line symbols are continuously displayed in a stopped state. In this case, one special signal period corresponding to the special signal is included in the output period of the special signal, and two or more public power open periods are included.

  Further, in the fifth gaming state (rush: highly accurate base), as shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, one special power release period is included in one special figure period (FIG. 31 ( (There is a possibility that almost all of the open period of public power is included in the period per special figure as in B)). At this time, the output period of the special signal corresponds to one special signal period corresponding to the special signal, and one special power release period is included in the one special signal period. That is, the output period of the special signal, the period per special figure, and the open period of the public power correspond to 1: 1: 1.

  As described above, the special signal is a signal corresponding to a gaming state per one special figure and one or a plurality of public power release periods associated therewith. It is also a signal for specifying a unit period that is advantageous to the player, including the period per special figure and the period for opening the general electric train.

  Note that when the game state is controlled to the special state per special figure of the probability variation A and non-probability variation A with no change from the low base state to the high base state, no special signal is output. In other words, the special signal is not output during a period when the player cannot expect to open the normal electric long.

(Advantageous state signal)
The game control microcomputer 100 changes the game state from the high base state to the low base state from the start of the game state per special figure type for changing the game state from the low base state to the high base state. An advantageous state signal that is turned on is output for a period until the end of the gaming state per hit special type, or for a period until the off symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined number of times (one time, 100 times).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the advantageous state signal at the start of the fanfare effect of the probability variation B (when the start designation command per special variation B is transmitted), ( 1) End of ending effect of uncertain change E (end of end effect per special figure executed in response to end designation command per special figure), and (2) Out of design without stopping display per special figure Is stopped and displayed 100 times continuously, the advantageous state signal is turned OFF when any of the conditions is satisfied.

  That is, an opportunity to change the gaming state from the high base state to the low base state from the start of the gaming state per special figure of probability variation B, which is a type per special figure, which is an opportunity to change the gaming state from the low base state to the high base state The advantage state signal is continuously output during the period until the end of the gaming state per special figure of non-probability change E which is the type per special figure. In addition, from the start of the gaming state per special figure of the probability variation B, the predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) is determined in advance in the low-accuracy and high-base state (fourth gaming state) without occurrence of the special figure. The special state variable display is executed, and the advantageous state signal is continuously output as the display result of the special number variable display of the predetermined number of times that can trigger the fall to the low base state until the off symbol is stopped and displayed. And

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 65, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the advantageous state signal at the start of the fanfare effect of the non-probability variation B (when the start designation command per special figure of the non-probability variation B) is turned on (1 ) End of ending effect of uncertain change E (end of end effect per special figure executed in response to end designation command per special figure), (2) first special figure variable display (third) that has shifted to the high base state As a result of the first special figure variable display executed in the gaming state), the off symbol is stopped and displayed, and (3) the off symbol is stopped and displayed 100 times consecutively without stopping the symbol per special symbol. The advantageous state signal is turned OFF when any of the following conditions is satisfied.

  That is, the gaming state is changed from the high base state to the low base state from the start of the gaming state per special figure of the non-probability variation B which is a type per special figure that triggers the change of the gaming state from the low base state to the high base state. The advantageous state signal is continuously output during the period until the end of the gaming state per special figure of the non-probability change E which is a type per special figure as a trigger. Also, the first special figure variable display executed in the low probability high base state (third game state) from the start of the game state per special figure of non-probability variable B (special figure variable display that can trigger the fall to the low base state ), The advantageous state signal is continuously output for the period until the off symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times) is determined in the low probability high base state (fourth gaming state) from the start of the gaming state per special figure of non-probability change B without causing any special figure. The special state variable display is executed and the advantageous state signal is continuously output as the display result of the special figure variable display of the predetermined number of times that can trigger the fall to the low base state until the off symbol is stopped and displayed. State.

  In the present embodiment, the period during which the advantageous state signal is output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponds to the period during which the player should play the right-handed game (the period during which the right-handed notification LED 37 is lit). Therefore, it can be said that the advantageous state signal is a signal that enables the player to specify the period in which the player should play the right-handed game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The signal output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like and input to the management apparatus 1000 is not limited to the signal described above. For example, when the special figure variable display is executed and the special figure display result is stopped and displayed. In addition, a symbol determination signal may be output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. The management apparatus 1000 can count the number of executions of the special figure variable display, etc., by inputting the symbol probability changing signal.

(Game data)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of game data stored in the storage device 1005. In the table corresponding to each of the game data 1 to 3, input of each signal of the above-mentioned safe signal (overall safe signal, right region safe signal), out signal, signal per special figure, special signal, and advantageous state signal The information of each item totaled based on is stored. Any of these items of game data can be displayed on the display device 1007.

  In the table relating to the game data 1 shown in FIG. 66 (a), information related to the safe number and the out number of each pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. Corresponding to the “unit number” that can identify the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed in the amusement hall, the “total number of outs”, “number of outs in the low base”, “number of outs in the high base” ”,“ Number of outs in advantageous state ”,“ Number of outs per special figure ”,“ Total safe number ”,“ Low base medium safe number ”,“ High base medium safe number ”,“ Safe state in advantageous state ”,“ The “medium safe number per special figure” and the “right area safe number” are stored.

  The “total number of outs” is the number of game media (number of game balls launched into the game area) used in the gaming machine regardless of the game state, and is counted based on the out signal. The “total safe number” is the number of game media paid out as a result of the game in the gaming machine regardless of the game state (the number of game balls given to the player as a prize ball), based on the overall safe signal Aggregated.

  The “low base medium out number” is the number of game media used in the low base state, and is counted based on the out signal, the signal per special figure, and the advantageous state signal. Specifically, the period in which the CPU 1002 is controlled to be in the low base state when the advantageous state signal is not input (OFF) and the signal per special figure is not input (OFF) (however, the game per special figure) The period is not controlled by the state), and the number of low base medium outs is totaled based on the out signal input within the specified period. The “low base medium safe number” is the number of game media paid out in the low base state, and is totaled based on the overall safe signal, the signal per special figure, and the advantageous state signal. Specifically, the period in which the CPU 1002 is controlled to be in the low base state when the advantageous state signal is not input (OFF) and the signal per special figure is not input (OFF) (however, the game per special figure) The period is not controlled by the state), and the low base medium safe number is tabulated based on the overall safe signal input during the specified period.

  The “high base medium-out number” is the number of game media used in the high base state, and is counted based on the out signal, the special signal, and the advantageous state signal. Specifically, the CPU 1002 identifies the period in which the advantageous state signal is input (ON) and the special signal is not input (OFF) as the period being controlled to the high base state, and within the specified period The number of high base medium outs is totaled based on the out signal input to. The “high base medium safe number” is the number of game media paid out in the high base state, and is counted based on the overall safe signal, the special signal, and the advantageous state signal. Specifically, the CPU 1002 identifies the period in which the advantageous state signal is input (ON) and the special signal is not input (OFF) as the period being controlled to the high base state, and within the specified period The high base medium safe numbers are aggregated based on the total safe signal input to the.

  “Out number in advantageous state” is the number of game media used in the period during which the advantageous state signal is input, and the CPU 1002 specifies the period during which the advantageous state signal is input (ON). Based on the out signal input within the period, the number of outs in the advantageous state is totaled. The “safe number during advantageous state” is the number of game media paid out during the period in which the advantageous state signal is input, and the CPU 1002 specifies the period during which the advantageous state signal is input (ON). The number of safes in the advantageous state is tabulated based on the entire safe signal input within the determined period.

  Note that the high base medium safe number may be totaled based on the right region safe signal input during the period in which the advantageous state signal is input (ON) and the special signal is not input (OFF). Further, the safe number during the advantageous state may be totaled based on the right region safe signal input during the period in which the advantageous state signal is input (ON).

  “Number of outs per special figure” is the number of game media used in the period in which the game state is controlled per special figure, and the CPU 1002 specifies the period during which the signal per special figure is input (ON). The number of outs per special figure is totaled based on the out signal input during the specified period. The “number of safe per special figure” is the number of game media paid out during the period in which the game state is controlled per special figure, and the CPU 1002 specifies the period during which the advantageous state signal is input (ON). Then, the number of safes per special figure is tabulated based on the entire safe signal input within the specified period.

  The “right area safe number” is a winning area provided in the right gaming area regardless of the gaming state, to the second ordinary winning ball apparatus 6B, the second general winning ball apparatus 29, and the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 27. This is the number of game media paid out based on the winning of the game balls, and is counted based on the right area safe signal.

  Here, during the period in which the advantageous state signal is output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, as a result of the game balls frequently winning the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27, the payout of the winning ball based on the winning (from the occurrence of winning) A certain amount of time may be required until the safe signal and the right region safe signal are output. If the management apparatus 1000 side ends the input of the advantageous state signal, the safe number in the advantageous state is not updated immediately based on the safe signals (the entire safe signal and the right region safe signal) input thereafter. In this way, the number of prize balls given as a result of the winning is not limited to the management apparatus 1000 even though the gaming ball has won the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 within the period during which the advantageous state signal is actually output. On the other hand, a situation may occur in which the safe number is not counted during the advantageous state.

  In order to avoid such a situation, in the management apparatus 1000, a predetermined period after the end of the input of the advantageous state signal (for example, a period until 10 seconds elapses after the advantageous state signal is turned off, or the advantageous state signal is turned off. The period until the symbol confirmation signal based on the special variable display that was executed for the first time is input) is the safe signal when the safe signal (overall safe signal, right area safe signal) is input. It is preferable that the safe number can be updated during the advantageous state based on (the whole safe signal and the right area safe signal). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to correctly count the safe numbers during the advantageous state.

  In the table (related to TY and T1Y) related to the game data 2 shown in FIG. 66 (b), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is associated with the “unit number” that can identify the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed in the game hall. “Special period occurrence count”, “TY (total number of unit difference balls)”, and “T1Y” are stored.

  The special period is a period in which the special signal is in the ON state in FIG. 65, that is, as shown in FIG. 65, the special figure jackpot type (probability B, non-probability B, probability change) that triggers the output of the special signal. C, non-probability change C, probability change D, non-probability change D, probability change E, non-probability change E, non-probability change F) from the start of the gaming state per special figure, (1) until the symbol per special figure is then stopped display Or, (2) until the off symbol is stopped and displayed for a certain number of times (1 time, 100 times), or (3) until the end of the special figure big hit gaming state of the special figure type (probability change E, non-probability change E) Is the period.

  The “number of special period occurrences” is counted by, for example, counting the number of times the special signal has been switched from OFF to ON (rise). In addition, “TY (total number of unit difference balls)” is tabulated based on the out signal, the overall safe signal, and the special signal. Specifically, the CPU 1002 counts the number of game media used in the special period (referred to as the special period out number) based on the out signal input during the period in which the special signal is ON, The number of game media paid out during the special period (referred to as the special period safe number) is counted based on the overall safe signal input during the period when the signal is ON, the special period out number and the special period safe number Are counted as “TY (total number of unit difference balls)”.

  Note that the number of game media paid out during the special period (special period safe number) may be totaled based on the right area safe signal input during the period in which the special signal is ON.

  Further, the CPU 1002 calculates the number of unit difference balls per special period based on the formula [total TY (total number of unit difference balls) ÷ number of special period occurrences], and the calculation result is expressed as “T1Y”. To do.

  In the table (payout rate) relating to the game data 3 shown in FIG. 66 (c), the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed in the game hall is associated with a “unit number” that can be identified, and “ The “low base payout rate B (%)”, “high base payout rate BA (%)”, “role ratio (%)”, and “corrected postage ratio (%)” are stored.

  The CPU 1002 calculates the low base payout rate B (%) based on the formula “low base medium safe number ÷ low base medium out number × 100%”. The low base payout rate B (%) is an index indicating the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls to the number of game balls launched by the player in the game area in the low base state. Further, the CPU 1002 calculates the high base payout rate BA (%) based on the formula “high base medium safe number ÷ high base medium out number × 100%”. The high base payout rate BA (%) is an index indicating the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls to the number of game balls launched by the player in the game area in the high base state.

  Here, it is assumed that the CPU 1002 stores a reference BA (%), which is a reference value of the high base payout rate BA (%) corresponding to the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the storage device 1005 or the like in advance. For example, the reference BA (%) is an upper limit value of BA (%) assumed in the model. Then, the CPU 1002 determines that the total BA (%), which is the actually calculated high base payout rate BA (%), deviates from the previously stored reference BA (%) (for example, the total BA (% ) Is higher than the reference BA (%)), a warning message notifying that the total BA (%) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is abnormal is displayed on the display device 1006 together with the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that the value of the total BA (%) and the value of the reference BA (%) may be displayed so as to be comparable with the warning message.

  In this way, the safe number and the out number of the high base period that is in the advantageous state (advantage signal input period) but not in the special period (special signal input period) are aggregated to calculate the aggregate BA (%), By displaying the relationship between the aggregated BA (%) and the reference BA (%), the game hall manager must know whether the relationship between the aggregated BA (%) and the standard BA (%) is appropriate. Is possible. Then, it is possible to take appropriate measures such as confirming whether or not fraud has been performed on the platform that has been warned.

  In addition, the CPU 1002 calculates the role ratio (%) based on the formula [safe number in advantageous state / total safe number × 100%]. The role ratio (%) refers to the number of game balls in all winning areas (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, first general winning opening, second general winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening) A winning area (ordinary winning opening) formed by a variable winning ball device (ordinary variable winning ball device 27, special variable winning ball device 7) with respect to the number of winning balls (total safe number) paid out based on winning. , The number of prize balls that are paid out based on the winning of game balls to the big prize opening).

  In this example, when a game ball is fired in the left game area, the ratio of the game ball winning to either the first normal winning ball device 6A or the first general winning ball device 28 (and given as a result of winning). The ratio of the number of game balls to be won to the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 (and the ratio of the number of prize balls given as a result of winning) is extremely low, and the right game area When a game ball is fired, it is compared with the ratio (and the ratio of the number of prize balls given as a result of winning) that the game ball wins in either the normal variable winning ball apparatus 27 or the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. Thus, the percentage of game balls to be awarded to either the second normal prize-ball apparatus 6B or the second general prize-ball apparatus 29 (and the percentage of prize balls given as a result of the prize) is extremely low. .

  Therefore, almost all of the number of winning balls awarded in an unfavorable state are not formed by the variable winning ball device, but are always in an open state, and the first ordinary winning ball device 6A and the first general winning ball device 28. A game ball is awarded to any of the above, and a normal variable winning ball device 27 formed by a variable winning ball device, and almost all of the number of awarded balls awarded in an advantageous state, and Assuming that a game ball is awarded to one of the special variable winning ball devices 7, it is based on the approximate expression [safe number in advantageous state / total safe number × 100%]. The role ratio (%) is calculated.

  On the other hand, with respect to the first normal winning ball device 6A and the first general winning ball device 28 that are not formed by the variable winning ball device and are in an open state, a certain number of game balls are fired in the left game area. The predicted value of the winning frequency (for example, one ball per 100 balls) can be stored in advance in the storage device 1005 or the like. In addition, with respect to the second normal winning ball device 6B and the second general winning ball device 29 that are not formed by the variable winning ball device and are in a constant open state, a certain number of game balls are fired in the right game area. The predicted value of the winning frequency (for example, one ball per 100 balls) can be stored in advance in the storage device 1005 or the like. It is possible to calculate the role ratio (%) based on each predicted value.

  Specifically, the CPU 1002 calculates the number of outs in the non-favorable state based on the formula [total number of outs-out number in the advantageous state], and calculates the number of safes in the non-advantaged state as [total safe number-advantageous]. It can be calculated based on the formula of “safe number in state”. Of the number of outs during the non-advantageous state (≈the number of game balls launched in the left game area), the number of winnings (predicted number) to the first normal winning ball device 6A and the first general winning ball device 28. The number of winning (predicted number) is calculated based on each predicted value. Further, based on the calculated number of winnings (predicted number) to the first normal winning ball device 6A and the number of winnings (predicted number) to the first general winning ball device 28 (1a) in the non-favored state, the first normal winning game The number of winning balls (predicted number) paid out based on the winning of game balls to the ball device 6A and the first general winning ball device 28 is calculated. Then, by subtracting (1a) from the safe number in the non-favorable state, (1b) the number of winning balls (predicted number) paid out based on the winning to the special variable winning ball device 7 in the non-favorable state It is possible to calculate.

  In addition, the CPU 1002 determines the number of winnings (predicted number) to the second normal winning ball device 6B out of the number of outs in the advantageous state (≈the number of game balls launched in the right game area) and the second general winning ball device. The number of winnings (predicted number) to 29 is calculated based on each predicted value. Further, based on the calculated number of winnings (predicted number) to the second ordinary winning ball device 6B and the number of winnings (predicted number) to the second general winning ball device 29 (2a), the second ordinary winning ball in the advantageous state The number of winning balls (predicted number) paid out based on the winning of game balls to the device 6B and the second general winning ball device 29 is calculated. Then, by subtracting (2a) from the safe number in the advantageous state, (2b) the number of winning balls paid out based on winning in the special variable winning ball device 7 and the ordinary variable winning ball device 27 in the advantageous state It is possible to calculate (predicted number).

  Then, the CPU 1002 can calculate a winning ratio (%) (referred to as a corrected winning ratio (%)) based on an equation of [(1b) + (2b)] / total safe number × 100%.

  The tabulation items tabulated by the management apparatus 1000 are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 66. For example, based on the formula [number of safes per special figure / total number of safes × 100 (%)], the connection ratio (%) May be calculated. In addition, the number of special periods (number of special signal inputs) included in one period in which the advantageous state signal is in the ON state may be counted as the number of consecutive times, and the advantageous state signal is input. The number of times (advantageous state signal input times) may be aggregated, and the average number of extended games may be calculated based on the formula [number of special period occurrences / advantageous state signal input times].

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to output two signals, that is, an overall safe signal and a right area safe signal as a safe signal. May be configured to output. Even in such a configuration, as described above, the high base / medium safe number (and BA based on this) is calculated based on the entire safe signal input during the period in which the advantageous state signal is ON and the special signal is OFF. The special period safe numbers (and TY and T1Y based on the special period safe numbers) can be totaled based on the whole safe signal input during the period in which the special signal is ON.

  Next, the output status of each signal according to the progress of the game will be specifically described with reference to FIGS.

  At the timing (0) in FIG. 67, the gaming state is controlled to the first gaming state (low probability low base state) or the second gaming state (high probability low base state), and the special figure variable display is executed. The special signal, special signal, and advantageous state signal are all OFF. Then, the special symbol variable display is terminated at the timing of (1), and the symbols per probability-specific B special symbol are stopped and displayed.

  Next, at the timing of (2) (timing of the symbol confirmation stop period elapses), the gaming state per special figure of probability variation B is started (fanfare effect is started), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned ON and special The signal is turned on and the advantageous state signal is turned on. Then, at the timing of (3), the gaming state per special figure of probability variation B ends (ending effect ends), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned OFF and the gaming state is the fifth gaming state (rush: Transition to high accuracy and high base state). Then, in the fifth gaming state, the special figure variable display is started at the timing (4), the special figure variable display is terminated at the timing (5), and the symbol per probability special E is stopped and displayed. As a result, the special signal is turned OFF.

  Next, at the timing of (6) (the timing of the symbol determination stop period elapses), the gaming state per special figure of probability variation E is started (fanfare production is started), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned on and special The signal turns ON. At the timing of (7), the gaming state per special figure of probability variation E ends (ending effect ends), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned OFF and the special signal is turned OFF. Then, in the fifth gaming state, the special figure variable display is started at the timing (8), the special figure variable display is terminated at the timing (9), and the symbol per probability figure of the probability variation E is stopped and displayed.

  Next, at the timing of (10) (timing of the symbol fixed stop period elapses), the gaming state per special figure of probability variation E is started (fanfare effect is started), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned ON and special The signal turns ON. Then, at the timing of (11), the gaming state per special figure of probability variation E ends (ending effect ends), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned OFF and the special signal is turned OFF. Then, in the fifth gaming state, the special figure variable display is started at the timing (12), the special figure variable display is ended at the timing (13), and the symbols per special figure of the uncertain change F are stopped and displayed. .

  Next, at the timing of (14) (the timing of the symbol determination stop period elapses), the gaming state per special figure of non-probability change F is started (fanfare production is started), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned ON, The special signal is turned ON. Then, at the timing of (15), the gaming state per special figure of non-probability change F ends (ending effect ends), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned OFF and the gaming state becomes the fourth gaming state (invincible (Zone: low-accuracy base state). Then, in the fourth gaming state, the special figure variable display is started at the timing (16), the special figure variable display is ended at the timing (17), and the symbols per special figure of the uncertain change D are stopped and displayed. Along with this, the special signal is turned OFF.

  Next, at the timing of (18) (the timing of the symbol determination stop period elapses), the gaming state per special figure of non-probability change D is started (fanfare production is started), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned ON, The special signal is turned ON. Then, at the timing of (19), the gaming state per special figure of non-probability change D ends (ending effect ends), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned OFF.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 67, the CPU 1002 performs the out in the special period based on the out signal and the safe signal (overall safe signal, right area safe signal) input in the special period in which the special signal is ON. The number of safes and the number of safes are totaled, and the difference between the number of outs and the number of safes in a special period can be totaled as the total number of unit difference balls (TY). In addition, by counting the number of occurrences of the special period, the number of unit difference balls (T1Y) per special period can be tabulated.

  In this way, a special signal that allows the special period including the open period to be specified is output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that it becomes a game system that increases the number of balls by winning a game ball on the normal train. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of award balls awarded with the opening of the public power can be appropriately tabulated.

  In addition, in this embodiment, a special period (one advantageous for the player) that includes the open period (special state) apart from the signal per special figure that can specify that the game state is controlled per special figure. By outputting a special signal that can specify the unit period) from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of award balls given in relation to a special state (opening period) different from the special figure big hit gaming state Appropriate tabulation is possible.

  In this embodiment, as shown in (2) of FIG. 67 and (22) of FIG. 68, which will be described later, the type per special figure (probability variation B and non-probability variation) that changes the gaming state from the low base state to the high base state. With the start of the gaming state per special figure in B), an advantageous state signal is output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. Once the output of the advantageous state signal is started, the output of the advantageous state signal is continued as long as the condition that it is controlled to the gaming state per special figure or is controlled to the high base state is satisfied thereafter. However, when the condition that the game state is not controlled per special figure and the low base state is controlled is satisfied, the output of the advantageous state signal ends.

  In this way, when the game state or the high base state per special figure is output, the output state is continued (the output state is continuously changed), so that the management device 1000 outputs the advantageous state signal. The number of outs (the number of outs in the advantageous state) and the number of safes (the number of safes in the advantageous state) during the period controlled to the gaming state or the high base state can be appropriately tabulated.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the period during which the advantageous state signal is output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the period during which the player should play the right-handed game (the period during which the right-handed notification LED 37 is lit). It corresponds to. That is, the number of outs in the advantageous state is the number of game balls that have been fired in the right game area in the right-handed game, and the safe number in the advantageous state is the number of game balls in the winning area provided in the right game area in the right-handed game. It is possible to count various game data, assuming that the number of game balls paid out based on winning.

  In addition, as shown in (6) to (14) of FIG. 67, in the high-accuracy and high-base state, the period during which the game state is controlled per special figure and the normal power release control period are approximately 1: 1. It corresponds. Therefore, in the high-accuracy base state, by counting the number of award balls granted in the period controlled to the game state per special figure, as a result, the game ball won in the normal winning opening during the open period As a result, the number of award balls awarded is counted as a unit difference ball number. As described above, in the highly accurate and high base state, by summing up the safe number and the out number in the period controlled to the gaming state per special figure, TY and T1Y can be appropriately summed up as a result. Therefore, in the high-accuracy base state, the output period of the special signal can be made to correspond to the control period of the gaming state per special figure (output period of the signal per special figure).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy and high-base state, the period for controlling the gaming state per special figure and the normal power release control period (special signal output period) can correspond to approximately 1: 1. Is possible. As described above, when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the game ball almost certainly moves the second start winning opening of the second normal winning ball device 6B within a predetermined period (0.2 seconds). It is based on the structure of passing through. With such a configuration, it is possible to start the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol within a predetermined period by one game medium, thereby controlling the game state per special symbol. It is also possible to make the period correspond to the open period of the ordinary train.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in (6) to (14) of FIG. 67, the advantageous state signal is inputted and the special signal is not inputted (the game state is not controlled per special figure). Based on the out signal and the safe signal (overall safe signal, right area safe signal) input during the period), the high base medium out number and the high base medium safe number are totaled to calculate the high base payout rate BA (%). I am trying to calculate.

  Next, referring to FIG. 68, from the first gaming state or the second gaming state to the fourth gaming state (invincible zone: low probability high base state) through the third gaming state (chance zone: low probability high base state). An example in the case of shifting to will be described.

  At the timing of (20) in FIG. 68, the gaming state is controlled to the first gaming state (low probability low base state) or the second gaming state (high probability low base state), and the special figure variable display is executed. The special signal, special signal, and advantageous state signal are all OFF. Then, the special figure variable display ends at the timing of (21), and the symbols per non-probable B special figure are stopped and displayed.

  Next, at the timing of (22) (the timing of the symbol determination stop period elapses), the gaming state per special figure of non-probability B is started (fanfare production is started), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned ON, The special signal is turned on and the advantageous state signal is turned on. Then, at the timing of (23), the gaming state per special figure of non-probability B ends (ending effect ends), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned OFF and the gaming state becomes the third gaming state (chance). (Zone: low-accuracy base state). Then, in the third gaming state, the special figure variable display is started at the timing (24), the special figure variable display is ended at the timing (25), and the symbols per special figure of the uncertain change C are stopped and displayed. Along with this, the special signal is turned OFF.

  Next, at the timing of (26) (timing of the symbol determination stop period), the gaming state per special figure of non-probability change C is started (fanfare effect is started), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned ON, The special signal is turned ON. Then, at the timing of (27), the gaming state per special figure of non-probability change C ends (ending effect ends), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned OFF and the gaming state becomes the fourth gaming state (invincible). (Zone: low-accuracy base state). Then, in the fourth gaming state, the first special figure variable display in the fourth gaming state is started at the timing (28), and the first special figure variable display is terminated at the timing (29). The symbol of the second miss is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the second special figure variable display in the fourth gaming state is started at the timing of (30), the second special figure variable display is completed at the timing of (31), and the second missed symbol is displayed. Stopped display. After that, as the display result of the third to 99th special figure variable display in the fourth gaming state, the symbols that are out of sequence are stopped and displayed continuously (the third symbol out of symbol to the 99th symbol out of symbol), (32 ), The 100th special figure variable display in the fourth gaming state is started, the 100th special figure variable display ends at the timing (33), and the 100th missed symbol is stopped and displayed. . As a result, in the fourth gaming state, the off symbol is stopped and displayed as a special figure display result for 100 consecutive times.

  As a result, the gaming state shifts from the fourth gaming state to the first gaming state (low probability low base) at the timing of (34) (timing of the symbol determination stop period). Along with this, the special signal is turned off and the advantageous state signal is also turned off.

  In this embodiment, as shown in (2) to (5) of FIG. 67 and (22) to (25) of FIG. 68, a game per special figure that triggers the transition from the low base state to the high base state The period from the start of the state (probability variation B, non-probability variation B) to the next stop of the symbol per symbol (probability variation E, non-probability variation C in this example) can be specified by a special signal. That is, the safe number and the out number in the period from the start of the first hit to the occurrence of the next special chart can be reflected in TY and T1Y. Here, the period from the start of the first hit (probability variation B, non-probability variation B) to the occurrence of the next special figure is defined as the first hit special period, and the safe signal (the whole safe signal, right Based on the area safe signal) and the out signal, the number of first special period safes and the number of first special period outs may be separately calculated, and TY and T1Y related to the first special period may be calculated separately.

  In addition, from the start of the gaming state per special figure (non-probability change B) that triggers the transition from the low base state to the low accuracy high base state, the symbol is not the result of the special figure variable display executed in the low accuracy high base state. The period until stop display can be specified by a special signal. That is, it is possible to reflect the safe number and the out number in the TY and T1Y in the period from the start of the first hit to the transition to the low base state without the occurrence of the consecutive resort. Here, the period from the start of the first hit to the transition to the low base state without the occurrence of a consecutive resort may be included as the aforementioned first hit special period.

  Next, in the fourth gaming state, a case in which a special symbol hit occurs before the off symbol is stopped and displayed for 100 consecutive times will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure variable display is started at the timing (41) in FIG. 69, the special figure variable display is ended at the timing (42), and the symbols per special figure of the probability variation D are stopped and displayed. Is turned off.

  Next, at the timing of (43) (timing of the symbol determination stop period), the gaming state per special figure of probability variation D is started (fanfare production is started), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned on and special The signal turns ON. Then, at the timing of (44), the gaming state per special figure of probability variation D ends (ending effect ends), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned OFF, and the gaming state is the fifth gaming state (rush: Transition to high accuracy and high base state). Then, in the fifth gaming state, the special figure variable display starts at the timing (45), the special figure variable display ends at the timing (46), and the symbol per probability figure of the probability variation E is stopped and displayed. As a result, the special signal is turned OFF.

  Next, at the timing of (47) (the timing of the symbol determination stop period elapses), the gaming state per special figure of probability variation E is started (fanfare production is started), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned on and special The signal turns ON. Then, at the timing of (48), the gaming state per special figure of probability variation E ends (ending effect ends), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned OFF and the special signal is turned OFF. Then, in the fifth gaming state, the special figure variable display is started at the timing (49), the special figure variable display is terminated at the timing (50), and the symbols per special figure of the probability variation E are stopped and displayed.

  Next, at the timing of (51) (the timing of the symbol fixed stop period elapses), the gaming state per special figure of probability variation E is started (fanfare production is started), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned on and special The signal turns ON. At the timing of (52), the gaming state per special figure of probability variation E ends (ending effect ends), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned OFF and the special signal is turned OFF. Then, in the fifth gaming state, the special figure variable display is started at the timing (53), the special figure variable display is ended at the timing (54), and the symbols per special figure of the non-probable change E are stopped and displayed. .

  Next, at the timing of (55) (the timing of the symbol determination stop period elapses), the gaming state per special figure of uncertain change E is started (fanfare effect is started), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned ON, The special signal is turned ON. Then, at the timing of (56), the gaming state per special figure of non-probability change E ends (ending effect ends), and accordingly, the signal per special figure is turned OFF and the special signal is turned OFF. Then, the gaming state shifts from the fifth gaming state to the first gaming state (low probability low base). Accordingly, the advantageous state signal is also turned OFF.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in (26) to (34) of FIG. 68 and (40) to (42) of FIG. 69, the special figure that has become an opportunity to shift to the fourth gaming state (invincible zone). From the start of the hit gaming state (non-probability change C) until (a) the special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) without the special symbol per symbol being stopped, until the transition to the low base state (B) Next, a period (referred to as an invincible zone special period) until a symbol per symbol (probability variation D in this example) is stopped and displayed can be specified by a special signal. It is possible to reflect the safe number and the out number in this invincible zone special period in TY and T1Y. Here, the invincible zone special period safe number and the invincible zone special period out number are separately counted based on the safe signal (overall safe signal, right area safe signal) and out signal input during the invincible zone special period. TY and T1Y related to the zone special period may be calculated separately.

  As shown above, once the special signal is turned ON in accordance with the start of the game state per special figure of the non-probable change B that triggers the transition from the first game state or the second game state to the third game state, As a special figure display result, the timing of shifting to the low base state due to the stop symbol being displayed in a stopped state, or the display result of the special figure per type (probability variation C) that triggers the transition to the high accuracy high base state The special signal is turned off at the timing when is displayed.

  In addition, once the special signal is turned on with the start of the game state per special figure of the uncertain change C, which is a trigger for the transition from the third gaming state to the fourth gaming state, then the off symbol is continuously stopped and displayed. While it is, it remains ON. Then, in the fourth gaming state, the timing of shifting to the low base state due to the fact that the special symbol display result is stopped and displayed 100 times consecutively, or the type of per special map that triggers the transition to the highly accurate high base state The special signal is turned OFF at the timing when the display result per special figure of (probability variation D) is stopped and displayed.

  In this way, in the low-accuracy base state, from the start of the gaming state per special figure that triggered the transition to the low-accuracy base state, (1) until the transition to the low base state, or (2) high TY and T1Y can be tabulated with the period of one unit as a unit until the display result of special figure per special figure that triggers the transition to the accurate base state is stopped.

  In the above example, the period in which the advantageous state signal is input but the special signal is not input is the target period of the high base payout rate BA (%), but the advantageous state signal is input. In such a case, a period that is not included in the period controlled in the gaming state per special figure may be uniformly set as the target period for BA (%). In the example of FIG. 70, payout based on winning in the normal variable winning ball device 27 and winning in the second general winning ball device 29 that occurred before the timing (X) controlled to the gaming state per special figure. All payouts based on the game are subject to the calculation of BA (%), and payouts based on the winnings to the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 that occurred after the timing (X) controlled to the gaming state per special figure. The payout based on the winning to the second general winning ball apparatus 29 and the payout based on the winning to the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 are both counted as TY and T1Y.

(An example of a gaming machine that increases the number of balls depending on the small hit gaming state)
According to the management device 1000 of the present embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the ordinary variable winning ball device 27 are provided. In the high base state, the special variable winning ball device 27 is connected to the normal variable winning ball device 27 rather than the special variable winning ball device 7. The game medium is constructed so that the frequency of entry is high, and the value (safe number, difference) given in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the game system in which the game ball is awarded to the normally variable winning ball apparatus 27 and the number of balls is increased. The number of balls) can be properly counted.

  However, the management device 1000 is not limited to the gaming machine as described above, and can be applied to a gaming machine that gives a player a gaming value in a special state different from the gaming state per special figure. For example, a gaming machine equipped with a special variable winning ball device, which is in a special state different from the gaming state per special figure and can be controlled to a small hit gaming state in which the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be opened. It is applicable to.

  For example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to a small hit gaming state can be controlled into a normal state, a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player, and a small hit gaming state, and is in a state different from the big hit gaming state. It is configured to be controllable after a big hit gaming state in a small hit time state (hereinafter referred to as “KT state”) advantageous for the player. The KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. The big hit gaming state corresponds to the above-described special figure hit state, the small hit gaming state corresponds to the aforementioned special period, and the KT state including the big hit gaming state that triggers the transition to the KT state is the above-described advantageous state. It corresponds to.

  Specifically, the stop symbol when the first special symbol on the first special symbol display stops when the fluctuation stops or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display stops when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops. When it is decided to make the symbol (special display result: probability variation symbol), the probability variation state where the probability of the next big hit is higher than the normal state, and the KT state (specifically, probability variation flag and special flag The state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, in which both state flags are set.

  In addition, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined as the probability variation symbol and controlled to the probability variation state, the probability that the first special symbol and the second special symbol become a big hit symbol is also high. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the second special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state.

  In the probability variation state, the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table is a predetermined multiple of the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the normal state. Yes. For example, a value such as “1/200” may be set for the jackpot winning probability in the normal state, and “1/80” may be set for the jackpot winning probability in the probability variation state.

  In addition, the KT state is a gaming state that is likely to be a small hit than the normal state. Specifically, since the variation time of the variation pattern selected at the time of the variation of the second special symbol is shorter than the normal state, the rate of variation with respect to a certain time is higher than that in the normal state. When the second special symbol changes, the game is set such that the probability of winning a small hit is high, and the gaming state is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state. In other words, the KT state is a state in which small hits due to the variation of the second special symbol occur at relatively short intervals because the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the normal state. .

  In such a game machine that can be controlled to the KT state, the jackpot gaming state that triggers the end of the KT state from the start of the big game state that triggers the transition to the KT state (the trigger that transitions to the normal state) An advantageous state signal is output during the period until the end of.

  In addition, (1) from the start of the jackpot gaming state that triggers the transition to the KT state, until the special figure display result (probability change pattern of the second special symbol) for the KT state to continue in the KT state is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the special signal is output during the period until the end of the big hit gaming state that triggers the end of the KT state (initiates transition to the normal state). In addition, (2) the KT state continues in the KT state from the start of the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the special figure display result for the KT state to continue in the KT state (the probability change symbol of the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed. Until the special figure display result (probability variation of the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed next, or until the end of the jackpot gaming state that triggers the end of the KT state (initiates transition to the normal state) During this period, a special signal is output.

  In this way, in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the small hit time state, by setting the advantageous state signal and the special signal as described above, on the management device 1000 side as in the above-described embodiment, TY and T1Y and the like can be appropriately tabulated.

[Data display device 200]
An information display device (for example, a card unit or a data display device) provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each pachinko gaming machine 1 also uses the same method as that of the management device 1000 described above, and the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 1 Game data can be aggregated, and display processing (for example, display of game data such as TY and T1Y, display of warning messages, etc.) according to the aggregated result can be performed.

  For example, the information display device is a data display device 200 installed above each pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponding to each pachinko gaming machine 1. 71, the data display device 200 includes a left frame LED 222 on the left side and a right frame LED 223 on the right side as viewed from the player (as viewed from the side facing the gaming machine). Each of the left frame LED 222 and the right frame LED 223 is an LED module configured by covering a large number of LEDs with a lamp cover portion formed of a transparent resin material. The light emitters of the left frame LED 222 and the right frame LED 223 emit light in a light emission color designated by control of a CPU 210 and an LED driver 252 described later. A central part between the left frame lamp 222 and the right frame lamp 223 is provided with a display device 220 constituted by a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and a lower frame part is provided with a call button 221 that can be operated by the player.

  The left frame LED 222 and the right frame LED 223 emit light in a predetermined manner based on the operation of the call button 221. Further, the display device 220 can display the game information that is aggregated in the data display device 200. The game information collected by the data display device 120 is controlled to be, for example, jackpot count, start count (variable display count since the previous jackpot occurrence), total start count (total variable display count for the day), and high base state. There are the number of consecutive resorts in the period, the maximum number of consecutive resorts on the day, TY, T1Y, and the like. In addition, the current gaming state can be displayed based on a signal per special figure, a special signal, an advantageous state signal, and the like.

  FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the data display device 200. The main board 200 a is equipped with a CPU 210 that performs control for confirming the input status of various signals in the data display device 200 and executing aggregating game information, and a RAM 211 and a ROM 212, which are stored in the ROM 212. A game information totaling program is executed by the CPU 210 using the RAM 211 as a work area, thereby controlling the operation of each component provided in the data display device 200 and performing various processes.

  The CPU 210 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that an operation action on the call button 221 has been detected from the button sensor 221 a via the input port 222. The CPU 210 notifies the store clerk that the call button 221 has been operated by causing the left frame LED 222 and the right frame LED 223 to emit light in a predetermined manner via the LED driver 252. Information indicating that the call button 221 has been operated is transmitted to the management device that can communicate with the data display device 200, and the call button 221 has been operated on the screen of the management device (and the corresponding machine number). May be notified. In addition, a real-time clock (RTC) 215 that outputs time information and a VDP 225 that controls display of the display device 220 in cooperation with the CPU 210 are mounted on the main board 200a.

  Further, the CPU 210 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 250 via the output port 240. In the lamp driver board 250, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 252 via the input driver 251. The LED driver 252 supplies current to the light emitters of the left frame LED 222 and the right frame LED 223 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In addition, the main board 200a is connected to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 1 with an overall safe signal, a right area safe signal, a special signal, a special signal, an advantageous state signal, a symbol determination signal, and the pachinko gaming machine 1. An input port 226 is provided as input means for inputting an out signal or the like output from a corresponding out ball counter. Various signals input to the input port 226 are input to the CPU 210 via the input driver 227. The CPU 210 confirms the input status of each signal to the input port 226, totals game information by the same method as the management device 1000 described above, and displays the total results, messages (including the warning message described above), etc. 220.

  For example, each item (including TY and T1Y) shown in FIG. 66 can be displayed as the total result. Here, “Number of occurrences of special period” is displayed as “Number of jackpots”, and the number of symbols that have been input after the special signal is turned off (number of input pulses) is displayed as “Number of start times” and input on that day. The number of symbol determination signals (number of input pulses) is displayed as “total number of start times”. In addition, when an advantageous state signal is input, the number of special signals including the first hit input within the input period of the advantageous state signal is displayed as “number of consecutive resorts”, A large number of consecutive resorts is displayed as "the most frequent consecutive resorts of the day".

  Also, for example, during the period when the advantageous state signal is input, the character “high base (or during probability change)” is displayed, and during the period when the special signal is input, the character “medium hit” is displayed. Information indicating the gaming state is displayed based on the signal output from the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In this example, the data display device 200 provided above the gaming machine and having a calling function is exemplified as the information display device provided in one-to-one correspondence with the gaming machine. The display device is installed on the side of the gaming machine, accepts recording media that can identify the player's proprietary value, such as the prepaid balance, the number of balls, and the number of balls, and supports the proprietary value specified from the recording media A card unit (also referred to as an inter-unit) that can be used for lending gaming media in a gaming machine that can be used to collect game data based on signals input from the corresponding gaming machine (or gaming state) And a display device capable of displaying the aggregated game data (or the recognized game state).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Production display device 7 Special variable winning ball device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 20 Normal symbol display device 27 Normal variable winning ball device 36 For opening notification LED
41 Passing gate 100 Game controlling microcomputer 103 CPU
120 CPU for effect control

Claims (1)

Special variable display means for performing variable display of special identification information and deriving and displaying a specific display result;
First control execution means for executing first control for changing the special variable device to an enterable state of the game medium in response to the specific display result being derived and displayed;
Ordinary variable display means for performing variable display of normal identification information and deriving and displaying a predetermined display result;
A second control execution means for executing a second control for changing the normal variable device to an enterable state of a game medium in response to the predetermined display result being derived and displayed;
A grant signal output means capable of outputting a grant signal for specifying a grant value given to the player;
Advantageous state signal output means capable of outputting an advantageous state signal corresponding to an advantageous state advantageous to the player;
A special signal output means capable of outputting a special signal for specifying a special period including a period during which the second control is executed regardless of whether or not a game medium has entered the normal variable device;
A gaming machine, further comprising:

Images